Home

Dodge 2009 Caliber SRT4 Automobile User Manual

1. 17 183 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 424 456 Selecion o ON 2ml eos 4 aoe eee ee oes 410 Sentry Key Immobilizer view ae ye es 15 Sentry Key Programming ii ss seen PRE DRAAK EN 17 sentry Key Replacement si ii ed RE bp ER EA 16 Service Assistance ERROR exa yg E oe 479 Service Contract us uuo ded rn SE DRR E ea ee HE 481 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator x uses oc x BARE RS 192 Service Manuals 4 46849 cR RR m Ro 844 483 Setting the Clock xs ies 214 228 230 233 242 254 peiling Pete se ems ace en Ro ene a DEAR 209 Shifting Automatic Transaxle sss 298 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 1299s 46 Shoulder Belts acu se aor KERE RD HORSE ARE AC ESOS 41 Slew OASE a ee ee ee RR DIE RE RS 63 Side View Mirror Adjustment 93 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 288 DIonidls TUM serere de on eee meia 85 124 183 450 Sirius Backseat TV Uconnect studios 263 Slippery Surfaces Driving On seems 306 Snow Chains Tire Chains 342 Snow Tires sia dE Herd in RE N EEE RSS 342 bound Systems Radio ses dane eine den wire p eie a 209 viec Tie PM EN 337 383 sed Se CET 456 Specifications Fuel Gasoline xcu leac sasie in kan wo ees 456 OU iste hadi Ghee eee eds OORL 410 456 Speed Control Cruise Control 132 version rr ban ss he ees 183 seal soos Age 6 hee oe Be Ee Oe os 25 295 Automatic Transmission
2. 339 OLiteOfTre METRE 340 ti Replacement Ties ea saak a WERE s 340 Vite Chains soe sacr dE XR SE 342 B Snow Tires eee 342 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 342 Mi Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 343 Has vlei A Tm 346 O Premium System If Equipped 348 O General Information use xit hoses 352 Bl Fuel Requirements 4 252 AZAL EWING MD 352 HOL EES CIT 209 o Reformulated Gasoline 353 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 354 O MMT In Gasoline E Materiais Added To Fuel iun to 355 O Fuel System Cautions estre mm 355 oO Carbon Monoxide Warnings 356 W Adding Fuel 22a de Rig BEE ER EE 357 ElFuel Filler Cap Gas Cap axve ueoieese 357 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 358 204 STARTING AND OPERATING See B Vehicle Loading 0008 959 o Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer O Vehicle Certification Label 399 ee EE OT id H Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR 959 EE ET id O Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR 359 Hi Towine Requirements iss box se a xs 370 E OVSHDOQUIS uo od eed arie EP 360 n LL LLL 9m AE EE P m W Trailer Towing 000004 361 1 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle H3 Common Towing Definitions 361 Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The O Trailer Hitch Classification 366 ST EE eu ee STARTI
3. 159 W Rear Window Features 168 O Rear Window Wiper Washer 168 159 O Rear Window Defroster 170 160 W Roof Luggage Rack If Equipped bd 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Manual Rearview Mirror Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light will illuminate next to the switch when the automatic dimming feature is activated 030407085 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight overlap of the view obtained from the inside
4. Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags SABIC air bags if equipped Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on severity and type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airb
5. ls 299 Cold Weather sad ER HEER EE EXP Beads 296 506 INDEX M Eise Pals to Start 44 RYE iA TURPE S 296 KOMOL casse ue P RE bh bens Rane peers ae ees 29 Starting aNd Operating esa cese perra dd Spa 29D Starting Procedures ess edocet e 295 Steering Cot ESO oos opened SEE OR ce SOR geen 151 o o TTC 310311 EDE O peee ee eee ee eee Shae ME 1i Wheel TIR ces eta N tendensene eee os 131 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound Dy ore CODI su e ops ohh oes oe TE 269 ORDE 44 ba RA de Brkt SOR BR OAD HR ES 156 447 Orages VENICE oats eon t one os RAAR OS 288 DUCK TOCO 244 SX XE V reas E RD ED 396 DUM ROOL FC C e 145 Sun Visor PXICNSION via pA anda bere A E Red d 96 DUEIPldsses DIOFdBB serere reit RES KERS HER a a 138 Sunroor Maintenance a sad DRR ER RD GREG 147 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 54 Sway Control Trailer 4422 39 ES RR 323 362 bvntietc Eng me OU sos ea ER ee Rae d EO ds 411 System Navigation Uconnect gps 253 System Remote Starting vss so se dea Rs 25 BE rdi rs MEM EN 184 Touts ass a Pra EE ee FEES See anaes eee 450 Telescoping Steering Column 131 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 270 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 181 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 76 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Theft System Security Alarm ss sek ene Es 17 Tie Down Hooks Cargo sis eo eg 165 Di Steere COMM sonceesacemece ong ee oe 131 Time Delay
6. Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob
7. Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment can not be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspection of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 How the Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy In case of AHR deployment both driver and front passenger seat AHR s will be deployed When AHR s deploy during a rear impact the head restraint front half extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries the driver and front passenger in certain types of 022607508 rear end impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or TY 4L Head Restraint Front Half not deploy in the event of a front or side impact Soft Foam and Trim Coven However if during a front impact a secondary rear 4 Head Restraint Guide 2 Seatback Tub impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever Ue ity and type of the impact Active Head Restraint AHR Components 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear
8. 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob
9. NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 The cover when extended covers the cargo area to keep items out of sight Notches in the trim panels near the liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not in use You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area To install the cover position it in the vehicle so that the flat side of the housing faces upward Then insert either the left or the right spring loaded post located on the ends of the cover housing into the left attachment point or the right attachment point shown a r a T EE Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover Insert the spring loaded post on the opposite end of the cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite side of the vehicle 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could cause injury in an accident It could become airborne during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you As the cover nears the liftgate opening guide the rear attach ment posts on both ends of the cover into the notches in the trim panels Lower the cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches and release the handle Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover vehicle Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger comp
10. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal or pulling the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the speed control without erasing the set speed from memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory To Resume Speed If you deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above 20 mph 32 km h you can resume the previous set speed To do so push the lever upward to RESUME ACCEL and release and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 5 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever w
11. A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly Continued Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a e A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger collision ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up a bit on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle WARNING The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate do
12. ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc e Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false com pass readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission gear selector lever in the PARK position Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approximately ten seconds until the current variance zone number is displayed To change the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 zone pres
13. LODGE 20100 Journey OWNER S MANUAL o m O IDEES e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION ipv 3193 EUROPEO IECUR SS xo es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS B introduction B How To Use This Manual 4 Wi Vehicle Modifications Alterations INTRODUCTION Bl Warnings And Cautions 6 4 INTRODUCTION See INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high guality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acguaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings
14. N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 479 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized selling dealer TThey know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service Th
15. Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day wi
16. Right Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating Low Fuel Cal Oil Change Required with a single chime Low Washer Fluid 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Coolant Low e Key in Ignition e Lights On e ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped Oil Change Required Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will display in the EVIC for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator me
17. e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transaxle power steering or air condition ing Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding 1 0 qt 1 0 1 of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end fy of the ra
18. ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and sever ity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle Supplemental Side Seat Airbag Inflator Units If Equipped The Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side collisions
19. planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous mannet which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ee All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer Anti Lock Brake Light The Anti Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS ies The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is reguired However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on If the ABS Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not functioning Immedi ate repair to the ABS system is required Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability d
20. then connect the replacement bulb 1 Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel well access panel and remove the access panel 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE NN Id 2 Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp CAUTION housing x Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place 5 Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and fasteners Tail Stop Lamp Rear Turn Signal Lamp Tail 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install Lamp Backup Lamp the replacement bulb The taillamps are a two piece design The tail stop rear turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body panels The tail and backup lamps are located in the liftgate N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 Changing the Tail Stop Rear Turn Signal Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the taillamp housing 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the body panel and the outboard side of the taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on the inboard side of the taillamp housing with the other hand Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing from the
21. 020207434 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry RKE Transmitter 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s door or twice within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The illuminated entry system will also turn on Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if
22. 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units If Equipped During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC airbags depending on severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain airbag The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window The air
23. Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com N F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction
24. If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics This condition will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME CAUTION If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho rized dealer this procedure consists of programming a bla
25. Refer to Trip Odometer button for additional information NOTE U S Federal regulations require that upon trans fer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the pur chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the odometer ECO esser de Ee ES Fuel Saver Indicator Off ECO on Fuel Saver Indicator On DL nh RAAD bea pees Di Hood Ajar snp sm ee ee ce RE ee eee ee eee ee Door Ajar BATE a pat es beeen eee pupa SX sis Liftgate Ajar pASCADP vom koe hr RS Fuel Cap Fault LOW tirE 0 Low Tire Pressure noFUSE sse Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required LoCOOL 442 ur re ROS n Low Coolant LoWASH Low Washer Fluid ESPOFF essen ESP De
26. These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision best Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the back of your seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as your injuries in a collision much worse You might necessary to make the belt go around your lap suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 259 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the front seat THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you
27. This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers 370 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION Continued e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles 805 km the new vehicle is driven The
28. a ics wone SR RR ded ae t 448 Clean aces sew xa Ge SE PO Wes ear qup s 438 pr A ER TE m 121 IH Tr AR ete e oque e OE EE 448 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 129 Lights On Reinet s aca Sioa dorm acean s t 123 On With Wipers 2 sis exo rac EER RE 121 130 lr n APP 125 OWC 30 3454548754408 bob ESOS TES 119 120 Time Delay nouus atre ead OS Ee RES 121 Heated MUUTOS siseste 5485 IUE ES HE RS 95 Heated Seals ois ceinudegevoe cigars erea 106 N INDEX 497 Heater Heater Engine Block High Beam Indicator High Beam Low Beam Select Dimmer Switch Hitches Trailer Towing Holder Coin Holder Cup HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter Hood Release eee 117 DUON 32249299 0 2 9929 ER RALL OE EXT EA 14 Key sae ou Sen ae He RD RR ew ees ga oes 12 14 lenition Key Removal st seen es HE ER MOE 14 iis teel FANY is on eie Ha n ER ees 18 Immobilizer Sentry Key es ERA HER R ae vens 15 Indicator Traction Control 192 Infant Restraint ii cee sce ke exci aut see 70 71 Inflation Pressure Tires eese 189 Information Center Vehicle anaana 200 Inside Rearview Mirror 424 515 0802 so oi ooo och 92 Instrument Cluster sees ER xh 8045 180 181 Instrument Panel and Controls 179 instrument Panel Cover lt ss6c8h49 h52 00000s 437 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 438 Integrated Power Module Fuses 439 Interior Appearance Care se ists
29. and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale light after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 CAUTION 22 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The TPMS has been optimized for the original aes ABS The light will turn on when the ignition equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and switch is turned to the
30. clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped
31. da od HAUL BATTERY HEATED MIRROR INSTRUMENT PANEL SEAT BELT SUDING DOOR TRUNK DECK um CONDITIONING CHILO BEAT GA WARHING TERA HALIL CHARGI AG BLE ST RELEASE TETHER ANCHOR BUTTON oe e 4 Ld w sS NX LEAD bu P ey LOWER ANCHORS GLOW PLUG POWER WIHDEHIELD WIPER SE AIRS AD AREA SUGNO DOOR PE yn ae LAE LIGHTER AND TETHER FOR WUCONNECT HAZARD FOUR WHEEL STEERING FLUID ANO WASHER CHILDREN LATCH BUTTON DRIVE LOW SRS X AIC Bs C Y B E Anene aw pigo Mas id 1i PUSH c WALFUNETION ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL PASSENGER CONVERTIBLE SEE OWNERS Am ELECTRONIC INDICATOR LIGHT eit TEM TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TOP DOWN MA MAL GO CONIHTIDMER STABILITY 010507683 CONTROL OFF 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and the title f 010807223 VIN Lo
32. equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating posi tions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag covers 81f4d757 Front Airbag Components 1 Driver s Airbag 2 Front Passenger s Airbag 3 Knee Bolsters NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on the severity and type of collision This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front an
33. eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropri
34. the genre listing on your iPod REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel The left and right hand controls are rocker type switches with a pushbutton in the center of each switch Reach behind the steering wheel to access the switches UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 045003761 Remote Sound Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel Right Hand Switch Functions e Press the top of the switch to increase the volume e Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume e Press the button in the center of the switch to change modes i e AM FM etc 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Left Hand Switch Functions for Radio Operation e Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station up from the current setting e Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next listenable station down from the current setting e Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to the next preset that you have programmed Left Hand Switch Functions for Media i e CD Operation e Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next track e Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to the beginning of the current track or to listen to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play e Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the secon
35. the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn OFF WARNING Sudden loss could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use of visibility through the windshield EE 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Mist Feature Push downward on the windshield wiper washer con trol lever to activate a single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle The wipers will continue to operate until you release the lever 031507504 Mist Control Headlights With Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 1
36. 3 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MO 9 8 Quarts 9 3 Liters PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 5L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 12 Quarts 11 4 Liters Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sa FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Encre Gsm MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hy 5 brid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 2 4L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Use API Certified SAE 10W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Engine Oil 3 5L Engine Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Power Transfer Unit PTU MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent Rear Drive Assembly RDA MOPAR Gear Lubricant 75W 90 or equivalent MOPAR DOT 3 SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used If D
37. 30 Automatic Dimming MIEEOE ooa eus e 92 Automatic Door Locks iis anaana RR xS 30 Automate Headlighis sss sera temema eee 120 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 186 204 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 278 Automatic Transaxle Ln 298 431 POCO EG rrr 431 433 457 gu AC 433 Flaid and Filler Changes s aeu eese HAS is 433 Fluid Level Check 40 04 40 amp od DY EE a va 431 433 Interlock Sy Stem seks aeq C84 sees nh een 299 300 Reset Mode sis secede eu ees ui comes BE RR MEER 303 Selection OF Lubricant 42 2923 3432 ddan ca 457 DATING od bon ep RUK enue eee and Bees 298 Dpedial MAGUINES us ders ve cee hs ERAS HARD aX 433 PONOSHCK gost ee Mo IESU est een ee eee ews 304 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 148 Auxiliary Power Outlet odes s dete mo ed os 148 Back Up Lights 4 442440 TE EE TE 450 PO 133999225029 50 358 REEL be eee eae ees 413 Chat eine System LISDE 2 iexegou a34eeg5ea 188 Gas CaO s scd e oa e Sub ace see b OOR 413 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 sesion 413 Belts Dede sues OE X Ss PESSPPesine 4 41 85 Body Mechanism Lubrication 417 POOE PC 12 Pilar LONON M PEPPER 330 Drake ASSIST SERE eade ecce SY dod eer oes 318 Brake Assist Warning Light 199 Brake Control System Electronic 316 Brake Puid S oos 9955 EA beagetee ane piits 457 Blake CKO x some eos 311 Brake oy SIC M ye be ee ee 314 429
38. 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an accident NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the head restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they have moved forward as shown in step three of the resetting procedure 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR 2 Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at a comfortable position THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism p 022607757 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mecha 022607497 nism 1 Downward Movement 2 Rearward Movement 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half 022607494 AHR In
39. Aw CONGMONING vues ves Vae irer xe 271 275 Air Conditioning Controls 271 275 Air Conditioning Filter secese gies ssas 289 415 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 290 Air Conditioning Rear Zone us boss rw ss BE 284 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 414 415 Air Conditioning System 271 275 278 414 Air Pressure Tires llle 189 335 bur 344 0545 tes Fone ash SPORE eee ee 54 64 Abad Deployment xu xu Lee EU RII EE ECRES 65 Caen bag ORE eee TE 56 62 68 85 195 Airbag Light Das Moi iiedGE AUS EE RE ROER eee RT 67 ANDID ide sies REEDE DRAERS 57 61 63 64 Airbag Window Side Curtain 58 61 64 Alarm Panic 23a mx sus ERE rans SA 23 Alarm Security Alarm iuuenem des 17 183 Alarm System Security Alarm 17 All Wheel Drive AWD sess 306 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio aa 259 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 424 425 454 DispOcdl ow Ga RS Oe x Hie AE hey oa ARE 427 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 315 316 Anti Lock Warning Light 2e 191 316 318 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Anti Ihe SVSICM 544 06 rR DADE doing amas 183 Appearance Care 2212943942 2239237 E beens 434 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 17 Audio Systems Radio 00 253 Auto Down Power Windows 35 N INDEX 489 Auto Unlock Doors esee
40. Change Interval 22 m icm mto eso x 186 204 410 CHECKING osse PIS SP ET EE PEN PIE PES 409 DEBSHOR 2 529 soar sd as bee eee VE ea PROP S 409 DispOcal barge err SEP tenes esu RE PES 412 FACE EA ET IT EO HOE 412 456 Filter Disposal pasate eee 49 2 94 98 99x a sb R 412 ldentilteation LOCO us se poor sur 9 ee cae ed 410 Materials Added AO sou an ees oe oes 6 E a 4 411 Recommendation een 410 454 OEG oues ves ub WR Mea ga s ege 411 VISCOSIY A ESEL IR Hb RE Ad 411 454 UPC CHANCE ue or nu soe 2 Yo Gaye AA PRE 412 Oil Filter Selection 22 xum xs 44 VORE 412 Onboard Diagnostic System 405 406 Opener Garage Door HomeLink 138 Operating Precautions asco acus ems RR RES 405 Outside Rearview Mirrors 5 93 OVEIGMIVE ix3xeESGer4 ee93eRe s 49 EER T p 184 302 Overhedd Console ERA EE RP TEES 197 Overeating Engine rers irrst apts Ke 182 380 502 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 483 Pan Ee coo regiraesdes4 ete ea ease oe ware 434 Panic Alarm 240444845 4d RE Eodem ES x RUE 23 Parkie Drake esu naked 9 9 93 9r ER HE 311 Passenger Seat Back Tilt Easy Entry System 112 P PIS a a ES ES 125 Personal Setune ua ded 4 393 56 tAn e deb 64 209 4 Aa e 82 Phone Cellular sie 2664 04 2044 24600 96 253 254 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 96 253 254 Placard Tire and Loading Information 330 Port Universal Serial Bus USB 253 LEB osnebeesdeeor ee
41. Headlight axe ven gcse ae ve ERE EROR 121 Tipe Oat 452 224544 546s 353 ARE r 14 Tire and Loading Information Placard 330 Tire Identification Number TIN 328 Tuc Wangs oe en oe ec bn bees s AE ESO 324 Tite Safety IniormaHOR ss ee KP EER iem Ren 324 ti 44654069 bees eas EN AE DNE ES 85 334 485 Aging Life of Mes as sc edocet RR 9 ados eos 340 RE RIET sd ed Sov 3 2S xu eR A OR 334 Gic nie geed RE RA Ee dea renee oe guess 342 CHOUCING tes Se bas aes wo E TUE Nara 381 Compact opale ca aate dion f a MR PER f ded ded 337 General Information ew ed eise DE Ear ae 334 PUGH eed Sceeeanecnaaae HERRIE eqn oad 336 AOU Die sites asie vex 9 oar qe one DER OE 335 JAC PTT 381 Lii ot dies n 340 Load Capacily siste ERROR RE 330 331 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 343 OU Gagne a dw ees darrer rier 485 cir MP rm 337 Replacement 64424445545 b45 595s E TS 340 KOGON a2 3 qp REP ERAS SI P SEES 342 voi A rv 324 334 SES EERS RD ER OE es REN EI Phe 326 SOOW SEE ac c d rS ee he RAS SOSA HAD H ws 342 ate DH usd SPA mE S S M eked anaes 383 DDIM o io 2 sata epu quoq Susa Verdi a 338 Trailer TOWING 224239 ERROR AR SR dedos cs 372 Tread Wear Indicators Ls 099 NG OVEN dood exco sa ehe aep Adr AD EG EEE 117 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 369 die AP 361 Behind a Motor Home 3 7 Disabled Vehicle sls 398 CHI aes tangas RR e eee eee caw
42. INSTRUMENT PANEL M Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc fo
43. Lami ac nncraeg acne AU dg 448 HE ontbos Lamp seses repas dade eas 449 o Tail Stop Lamp Rear Turn Signal Lamp Tail Lamp Backup Lamp ace AR D 65 044 ened 450 EL License Plate Lamp aue veins S EED RAS 453 W Fluid Capacities 0004 454 B Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts 456 mico A a MR 456 si M P 457 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 403 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L G b ANS EX B uU X 070307227 Engine Coolant Reservoir 7 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 8 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 3 Engine Oil Fill 9 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 11 Engine Oil Dipstick 6 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 404 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 4 Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post 5 Remote Jump Start Negative Battery Post 2 6 070907225 6 Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM 7 Air Cleaner Filter 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Dipstick 10 Engine Oil Fill N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 405 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II This
44. OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio MEDIA CENTER 830N REU AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD HDD NAV CHANGER IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REU Multimedia system contains a radio Sirius Satellite Radio player navigation system six disc CD DVD player USB port 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD and the uconnect phone cellular system A 7 in 17 8 cm remote screen allows easy menu selec tion while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes more than 1 000 words for audio navigation entertain ment and hands free mobile phone use The satellite navigation capability combines a Global Positioning System GPS based navigation system with a remote color screen to provide maps turn identifica tion selection menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destinations and routes A shared HDD for the navigation system the database and other radio features allows uploads of music and photos from CDs or through the USB port The Gracenote database finds the artist track and title for the music 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen
45. ON position and may warning have been established for the tire size stay on for as long as four seconds equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Refer to If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced Tire Inflation Pressures under Tires General as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Information and to Tire Pressure Monitor System brakes Furthermore the ABS light should be checked TPMS in Starting And Operating for further frequently to assure that it is operating properly If the information light does not turn on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 23 Electronic Stability Program ESP Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as pos
46. Progress around the bolt circle tightening the nut oppo site of the one you previously tightened until the final torque is achieved Recommended torque is 95 ft lbs 130 N m 392 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JUMP STARTING CAUTION If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster other booster source with a system voltage greater pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor so please follow the procedures in this section carefully alternator or electrical system may occur WARNING When temperatures are below the freezing point electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions attempt jump starting because the battery could rup ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above the freezing point before attempting a jump start Preparations for Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery posts located on the left side of the engine compartment WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 i F i aa I
47. SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following EDIT Characier format types Program Type Display 16 Digit Character rogram Type Displ isplay No program type ee or undefined 7 7 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next freguency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pres
48. SE EE dd O General Information 305 202 STARTING AND OPERATING M ll All Wheel Drive AWD If Equipped 306 Bl Driving On Slippery Surfaces 306 Reese ON Pn 306 A CDON Gus ott EES ARE ye RP ERES SES 307 W Driving Through Water 307 Plowing Rising Water 0064 3444 enhn 308 W Power Steering 002005 310 H Power Steering Fluid Check 311 MP kis Brake ues see ke RES sued 311 la Brake System useless 314 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 315 N Electronic Brake Control System 316 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 316 O Brake Assist System BAS 318 Li Traction Control System TCS 4 3 moe e 319 O Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 319 O Electronic Stability Program ESP 320 0 ESP BAS Warning Light And ESP TCS Indicator IGN 4a aum cha dran EK 323 o Trailer Sway Control TSC a vnd 90444 323 W Tire Safety Information 324 El lite MOKOS oo GE rena panra 324 O Tire Terminology And Definitions 329 H Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ss sies 330 Mi Tires General Information 334 bielie ie oucceexe Pen adr deron EE 334 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 D Tire Inflation Pressures 335 O Radial Ply Tes RA DI EE EE 337 AC Compact Spare TE ss EE ee RO LR das Dod E Deo EHI at was sede wes dur AS EE 338 O Tread Wear Indicators
49. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use c
50. Stop Lamp AM ahi C eben caw epee est LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal 3157K Rede Jal 4 pong ep hs peeks ee eee ee yk Oe Di 3157K Backup Lamp seris soho Movs ceded oe ge 4 3157K License GIN rm 168 BULB REPLACEMENT Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Turn Signal Park Lamp Side Marker Lamp 1 Open the hood NOTE It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM aside to replace certain lamps in the left headlamp housing 2 Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the headlamp housing N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate it 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place sidazoaa Front Fog Lamp 1 Front Turn Signal Park Lamp Bulb NOTE Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing 2 de Marker Tamy Buli the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right 3 Low Beam Headlamp Bulb 4 High Beam Headlamp Bulb front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the heel well 3 Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and Se We
51. To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately
52. Voice Command System Ir EgalpDeU eier stis oe rm AR 225 D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone J Boule snap 9 9 94 95 SR d ded oO Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN ie ei T E ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Afd MP3 Audio Play usc iei dt net O Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio ie 44454 4 44 00 RE ee ge 4 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play s ribs x gues 247 O Notes On Playing MP3 Files 249 O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 252 D Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play 202 ll Media Center 830N REU AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD HDD NAV Changer If Equipped 209 O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio 254 D Operating Instructions connect PHONG se cnc ex thee RARE AS 254 El Clock Setting Procedure iioii 444 254 Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ Radios ODD saos Aar ee DERS oss X EE Dy Sem ACH ac usen SR dens no o Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN
53. When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR parts and cares about your Satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual A OY WATER IN FUEL HEN pond B J REAR WINDOW a am am Cy rd M EXTERSOR BULB FAILURE 85 hk S e MASTER LIGHTING SWITCH INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER Deo 7d a amp g WM O E TURM SIGNALS os a e KEY ACTIVATE UPPER AND LOWER iai POWER OUTLET AR OUTLET mir SEAT Ma ig 1 THE PRESSURE MONITOR INTRODUCTION 5 ESP BAS Eer rr ELEC SPEED CONTROL ASSET aT STEMS BRAKE V D BRAKE SYSTEM HILL DESCENT WARHING PARKING CONTROL BRAKE d FR w ND sy Hw Oa fm ER Aa DOME LIGHT FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE LOWER AIR REGIRERLAT KON ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHUOCK FLL LEVEL OUTLET AE ET DOR SONT DAVE BARING STATEN i Pal TA mJ 200 O EG de MA 4WD BRAKE ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM ENGINE DIL ELECTRICALLY RLAR FOG LAMP iso UTeATE aa ee aan are VENTILATING FAM WINDOW LOCH THROTTLE Tone Ed EE Ee E r n E fli fe TOW Li N
54. a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR
55. and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturers recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged caus
56. as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may indicate severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop shut the engine OFF and al
57. by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize t
58. check carefully behind your vehicle and be sure to check for pedestrians animals other vehicles ob structions or blind spots before backing up You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death CAUTION e To avoid vehicle damage ParkView should only be used as a parking aid The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path Continued 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e To avoid vehicle damage the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Park View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen It is recom mended that the driver look frequently over his her shoulder when using ParkView NOTE If snow ice mud or anything else builds up on the camera lens clean the lens rinse with water and dry with a soft cloth Do not cover the lens Turning ParkView On or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Press the camera setup soft key 4 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key 5 Press the save soft key 6 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of
59. could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the Jack Storage Location vehicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 383 Spare Tire Location The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch mechanism Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible avoid icy or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 6 Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if chang
60. directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In Winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Air Filter will reduce but not eliminate diesel and agricultural smells The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service intervals 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 34 and lt 4 Set the temperature control to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the button to turn recirculate off If its sunny set the Mode control at or near
61. e Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Seat Track Release Lever e Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions Tether Strap Mounting 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 mi 500 km After the initial 60 mi 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttl
62. eia au eem as 253 Cellular Phone 96 253 254 271 Certncdton Lapel uw geet edna ye riy 959 Chains Tire a dior ae aaa PRE 342 Changing A Flat Tire NE OE EE S 381 Charing system Light ua see 4544564 tikiti 188 Chari THE SING seg eee oe eee FEE IE 326 N INDEX 491 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 406 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 83 Sic Mr 83 Child Booster Seat eis 4444500 ax aba In ede ibr 12 Child Restraint 70 71 74 78 80 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 76 78 Child Salety LOCKS sind ERR RA RATES 32 Tenn it C dsollble e fence cate E wx Y on See ee 353 Cleaning hcl rerepa OE Gums oe DR RE aa E E 436 Windshield Wiper Blades 418 Climate Control MAA re nnns OR EN 271 CIOE eet ra EER ER 214 228 230 233 242 254 Coin Hold 1esiudoemiesu 6242555455 8 He bes 156 Cold Weather Operation 2 04 uus reso ER BRAK E 296 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 270 Compact pate Tr s dey FPE SURE AES os 34 997 COM pass 222 dot EERS be SOR dee bo io Sob d 196 199 206 Compass Calibration iss WE v e LES 199 207 Compass Variance eseud uoe ior 08586 itd 198 208 Comp ter TD lave satan os eg e ies sri 204 Connector DET o9 su REPE MEUS EU E ee 265 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 265 Gom eties Hel spars rera dC RE ans ge a 204 Console Floor eee eee eee 156 Console Overhead i wewsss
63. ena EE EA dee ane 253 Power BEES serstakar ea oe ne ee ee ee ee es 314 Door LOCKS 22 4 nue euch de ER ARS oo EX ES 29 aveit 222229999 3 oe BEK Bod AAR EE 152 INDEX M AOS peranan aerer krna ES 94 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 148 c pP EHI 102 EENS AMD DE ao 4s eh eS oo 310 311 EO s 2 854 mis EER settee hy teen CERE 145 ln PTT TT 34 Windows Express Down 004 23 Power Steering Pid 4 640658 ocho em des 457 Power Inanster Umit sees aeo AE ER wx e pra e 457 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 53 Preparation for Jacking sine ES nies oa P ens 383 Pretensioners Deal DES LC eons EE eae 48 Programmable Electronic Features 209 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry 00 6 19 AGIAN NCS a Bek a ee ritini Ich REPOS 337 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 426 N INDEX 503 Radio Navigation Uconnect gps 209 Radio Operon 650449654 ceki eS a ih 254271 Radio Remote Controls xe sede e es 269 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 253 254 258 263 Radio Sound Systems is s dors edi d A chaos 299 Rear Air Condimonine eeu sacs gie digri 284 Reat Camera scie a ses oe aoe BOOR eae ee HO 135 Kear Cupholder Jua oi ne GEE s PARE Ri RR 154 Rear iipai iss ora PERE HAD ET Bi 38 Rear ea old ane ea o e 108 115 Rear Window Defroster im 60 5 too cond DE RD ee 170 Rear Window Features voccs oer ea cea a 168 Rear Wiper Washer u
64. engine axle or other parts could be damaged Continued 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance Schedule Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings WARNING Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 371 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a and that it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transaxle steering suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued grade When
65. fault will also n nuni n sound a chime In addition the EVIC will display a n do rA CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and a en aae then display dashes in place of the pressure value to ae EL MA M indicate which sensor is not being received 81826bd7 NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 351 If the ignition switch is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYS TEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition switch cycle the TPMS Telltale light will remain on and a chime will sound In addition th
66. is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be pro tected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks e Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct
67. it do so pull the latch release loop located at the top of the toward you to raise the seatback Continue to raise the seatback upward allow the seatback to recline and seatback until it locks in place Raise the head restraint to release the release loop lock it in place E RM NUN WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passenger in the event of an accident 14 130k Continued Assist Strap N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 WARNING Continued e Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat dE UM EE with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Two latches must be released to open the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel Hood Release 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i 2 Outside of the vehicle locate the safety latch lever Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open near the center of the grille between the grille and hood pos
68. light will also turn on for about three seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON 11 All Wheel Drive AWD Failure Indicator Light mm If Eguipped This light monitors the All Wheel Drive AWD AWD system The light will turn on for a bulb check when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as three seconds When lit solid There is an AWD system fault AWD performance will be at a reduced level Service the AWD system soon 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When blinking The AWD system is temporarily dis abled due to overload condition 12 Tachometer This gauge measures engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 Before the pointer reaches the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 14 Seat Belt Reminder Light 4 This light will turn on for several seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON as a reminder to buckle up This light will remain on as long as the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled Refer to Occu pant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 15 OdometerlTrip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage
69. lock switch is on each front door trim e For personal security and safety in the event of an panel Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and accident lock the vehicle doors before you drive as liftgate well as when you park and leave the vehicle l When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition and lock your vehicle Unsuper vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle 021807255 Power Door Lock Switch Location 1 Unlock 2 Lock 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To prevent you from locking your Key Fob in the vehicle the power door lock switch will not operate when the Key Fob is in the ignition and either front door is open A chime will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer See your authorized dealer for programming Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3
70. lower Climate Control Instrument Panel control is set to any position other than the RR settings will be controlled by the Instrument Panel lower control Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for cold air and clockwise for heated air 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M When rear controls are locked by the front system the lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and the rear overhead adjustments are inoperable The rear airflow modes will mirror the front unit opera tion Rear PANEL mode is automatically selected when the front control is in the PANEL mode When the front unit is in BI LEVEL mode airflow will be emitted from both the upper and lower rear outlets When the front control is in FLOOR DEFROST or MIX modes airflow will be directed out of the rear floor outlets Rear Mode Control Headliner Mode gt Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets Two an
71. no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if ever comes first required Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator Once a Month message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in as required Understanding Your Instrument Panel or under In strument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odom eter in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed 462 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following At Each Oil Change pages for the required maintenance intervals e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the brake hoses and lines CAUTION Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E
72. obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 CAUTION WARNING e Driving through standing water limits your vehi e Driving through standing water may cause dam age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not con tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further dam age Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Gett
73. oes 289 415 Automatic Transaxle iese EE ERAS E RS 433 PCW OU ss teg tes 6644 eee ee ee ER 412 456 Engine Oil Disposal ase 4494 RAK DER A12 Flashers Hazard WANING aca or de den Oe GAS 380 Tib SION AN eoo EE EIE 85 124 183 Flash To Pass uv ku 306 SERE EMES SEE ER RERO 8 125 Flooded Engine BOTINE ss uus d acm er e 296 Floor Console 24264444444 544548866 ireti 156 Fluid Brake ee 457 Fluid Capacities SARON EE EE EE 454 Dd bOdgES 23 oes ER OE 953 x A ST 86 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 431 433 N INDEX 495 DEKE RT ETTLETSTT TT TERR DEERE 429 457 COONS SEM peeta rA EP Poe FER DIRE P 423 Eie CL is RESESSIE ce eR ERE ve ont 409 Power te tE occus ma Racks tomas dad 311 457 Inr 456 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 456 Foe Tight DelvVice soe are aoe opus eee Ee 449 ee AE ORE ETER OE ET EE 119 123 182 449 Foldin edt el eerder ent Epee bee EE 115 108 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 4 2 ues ga eae eo ee 396 l sasha eee eo ies oa e ae DE ee de 352 A 27445 coho hoe ARTEA 357 hou TR 355 CIRA ip ass WX desc ar e eee eas 909 ao nan ons aa PERE ae PAAR HEER 204 ir ele SEARLE EE es OA UR oe ees 354 Fuller Cap Gds Cap iis seks fen eee d os 357 8 RS SEE ER EE TEE 352 GO perar EEEIEE aE EE 181 Matenas Added 443445 SE ESE EERS ERA DA RE 355 MOEnaDOL usu euo one oe eE BAD DA 354 Oe RI ue dong Hi ass 2 Ms Rab N OER 352 456 ReGUILCIICM S uc adea ques wq ean ee eh eG ea ees 992 PAVED Mode sad
74. orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the 484 vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment e Owner s Manuals IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143
75. programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 sec onds Then press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Using the Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE e The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic Alarm is activated However the exterior lights and horn will remain on e You may need to b
76. straight out of the housing 6 Install the A C air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is labeled with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 7 Reinstall the glove box door Make sure that the hinges are seated fully as you raise the door Otherwise the door latch will not align properly Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amoun
77. strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 341 WARNING WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originall
78. switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Open ing either front door will cancel this feature Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 min utes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Auto Down Feature The driver s power window switch has an Auto down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way press the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto down operation pull up on the switch briefly 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Auto Up Feature with Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped On some models the driver s and front passenger s power window switch has an Au
79. tees adecds 437 Ieder LI BS usce Me NSS Verg Se ut 119125 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 128 MAOTU fat ooo a ou RI oh ee oe EH D 4 Inverter Power 4 2 4 644444440445 ER 3 4 ERES 152 lack Location sisie ER RR EER EER DR ER 382 Jack Operation is id n acp SEBRA bz 381 387 Jacking Instructions sss 74 4644 ririt cen eats 387 Jomp Sarna serrr perep 392 Key OPTAMIMING 24 24 143 3 9e rFIORSCE RES 23s 17 498 INDEX NEE id Key BeDIQeemBHl urueeesegee set rear 16 Key sentry ImmobiliZeL sis sos cease a eae at ed 15 key lende e sace tesa enia d HE EEEa ees 15 Keyless Entry System ed aa ede db eee boo 19 KOs ETT 12 Knee Bolster sot ESE SMEER REY Y TS 54 56 Lane Change and Turn Signals 124 ap Shoulder DENG cox soe seed Sue a EE eR eden 41 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for inl PET 76 78 atc De anatase eave hee ee ee eee eae T P 42 Ate PC 86 lood 442444844454 EY E SE oo ees EER ES 117 Lead Free Gasoline 00 0 eae 352 Leaks PI 4 244 EE RAW bee eee ees 86 Eie ol TES baaie ee des ow EG rede RES 340 ARCS so cepa PE ee be EERS Gee nee EE 38 Liftgate Window Wiper Washer 168 Eie lit Bulbs issues SR OE 393 wa PE ego oe S 85 447 Lene ReplaeetieiE 5445354 oeede ter ee Et e 448 FIGS noise pea deena tan EQUES 85 119 448 MURA P 56 62 68 85 195 Pil boek 25 unde ha eR pu E IUE RE 318 Anti Lock Wale ose soe oe EER RED 3 40695 I91 Anatomie Hede asd ed oboe aw Hi DI 120 B
80. tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 488 INDEX NEE Id About Your Brakes len 311 314 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 191 315 316 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 425 Adding Fuel Adding Washer Fluid ld diges FMC 26445544445 40644524 oe HORS 355 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 412 Air Conditioner Maintenance 414
81. the liftgate or turn the Dimmer Control completely upward to the second de tent For models equipped with LED lighting you can swivel the lens socket to direct the light as desired Models without Overhead Console There are two courtesy reading lights mounted in the headliner between the sun visors Press and release the button next to the lens to turn the lights on or off 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M manually A courtesy light is also mounted in the head liner above the second row passenger seats Press and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the dimmer control completely up ward to the second detent Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically within 10 minutes of turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open Cargo Light This light is mounted in the liftgate trim panel It turns on when you press the UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter open a door or the liftgate or turn the dimmer control completely upward to the second detent WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch lo
82. the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function A TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle For Uconnect Voice Command refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainm
83. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 337 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 338 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Temporary
84. to e A battery powered infrared remote control that snaps allow the rear seat passenger s to view the display into a molded compartment in the center console e Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passen gers to listen to the same or individual audio sources Audio Video RCA Jacks AUX Jacks on the rear of the center console enable the monitor to display video directly from a video camera connect video games for display on the screen or play music directly from an MP3 player 1 Video in yellow VES with Rear HVAC Controls 2 Left audio in white e The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow 3 pi ght audio in red front seat operation for easy setup in the case of younger rear seat passengers NOTE Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES User Manual for detailed operating instructions NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE UCI IF EQUIPPED NOTE This section is for sales code RES REL and REQ RET radios only with uconnect For sales code RBZ REN REZ touch screen radio and REU REX RE1 radio refer to the separate User s Manual This feature allows you to plug an iPod mobile digital device into the vehicle s sound system through a connec tor UCI connector using an optional connection cable available through MOPAR See your authorized dealer for details Using this feature e the iPod audio can be pla
85. to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting
86. to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode during cold start ups the blower fan will remain on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the front ATC display until the engine warms up The fan will engage immediately if the DEFROST mode is selected or by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button and setting the fan to any fixed blower speed 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode NOTE Each of these features operate independently from each other If any one feature is controlled manually the temperature doors will continue to operate automati cally The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by pressing the Front Upper ATC Panel blower rocker button The fan will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the AUTO mode The operator can also select the direction of the airflow by selecting one of the following positions Panel Mode gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off
87. tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the
88. torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Lower the jack to its fully closed position N WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 391 WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 11 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area Do not stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 12 To stow the winch cable and retainer fit the as sembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch mechanism click three times It cannot be over tightened 13 Stow the jack handle and jack 14 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Adjust the tire pressure as required Wheel Nuts Tighten all wheel nuts occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated This is especially important during the first few hundred miles kilome ters of operation and after changing a tire This allows the wheel nuts to seat properly All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque Tighten the wheel nuts to the final torque in increments
89. use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Prolonged use of limited use spare or an incorrect tire size on either front wheel may damage transaxle differential and result in loss of vehicle mobility Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or icy conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or fai
90. using methanol gasoline or E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of methanol MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor Se eau nia reformulated gasoline e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor Materials Added to Fuel mance and damage the emissions control system All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add an
91. when exiting your vehicle in an unlit area It provides the safety of headlight illumination for up to 90 seconds after turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position To activate the delay turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position while the headlights are still on Then turn off the headlights within 45 seconds The delay interval begins when you turn off the headlights Only the headlights will illuminate during this time 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If you turn the headlights or parking lights or ignition switch ON again the system will cancel the delay If you turn the headlights off before the ignition they will turn off in the normal manner The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center potion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate th
92. which includes 3 A E 150 Ibs 68 kg Package persons amp Luggage 1 000 lbs 454 kg 100 lbs 45 kg 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m which includes 5 to 7 Except for AWD persons amp Luggage models 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M l GCWR Gross Com Max GTW Gross Engine Transaxle bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 3 500 lbs 1 588 kg 8 300 lbs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m which includes 1 5 350 Ibs 159 kg persons amp Luggage 3 000 Ibs 1 361 kg 3 5L Automatic with 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m po elc 5a 300 Ibs 136 kg Trailer Tow Prep 2 500 Ibs 1 134 kg 8 Ex Packese 8 300 lbs 3 765 kg 40 sq ft 3 7 sq m which includes 5 to 6 250 aes es We persons amp Luggage oe daca eps 2 500 Ibs 1 134 kg TE 8 300 Ibs 3 765 kg 40 sg ft 3 7 sg m which includes 7 per Es e ee sons amp Luggage P NOTE e The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information e For All Wheel Drive AWD models carrying 5 to 7 persons and luggage will exceed the rear Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR and therefore should not be attempted ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer
93. will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is
94. you can use as a work surface when the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion Seat Height Adjustment Lever NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 ans VUE Fold Flat Seat Seatback Release Pull upward on the lever to fold or unfold the seat WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NN ed Sages HMM warning uar WARNING The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near the floor Use this switch to move the seat up down Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is forward rearward or to tilt the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could Bs cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked riri CAUTION DO NOT place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Adjusting Active Head Restraints To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head Active Head Restraints can reduce the risk of injury in restraint on some models you may need to press the th
95. your absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or open a door or the liftgate NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 This feature also turns on the approach lighting if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned ON NOTE The illuminated entry system will not operate the interior lights if the Dimmer Control is in the extreme downward Defeat position REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft 20 m using a hand held Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE Inserting the Key Fob into the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE transmitter however the buttons on the remaining RKE transmitters will continue to work Driving at speeds 5 mph 8 km h and above disables all RKE transmitter buttons for all Key Fobs
96. 1 of washer fluid when the message LoWASH appears in the instrument cluster WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further informa tion CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst
97. 147 EL ie HomeLink 2466564255405 Tear hs 143 O Venting Sunroof Express 147 O Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Hounsbede Operon 232 652055 pde os 147 DUWON oie eek SEERDE db dU PE E XV ER EE 143 D Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 cece cesses 147 Ne ZELLE em O Sunroof Maintenance si exe and e gne e 147 El Troubleshooting Tips ss soe eec dos 144 D Ignition Off Operation 148 O General Information 144 ueunootEuliv closed N EEN eN 148 Moer a a ebsdusdqueds Hm W Electrical Power Outlets 0 0 148 aie ea a ii N Power Inverter If Equipped 152 O Opening Sunroof Express 146 W Cupholders TER OE EE ET OE 154 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Site ilo a ESE ER DE ee ee B Instrument Panel Storage Compartment If EGUPPEd 4 42 vi ESE EE SR RE xA TES Et oisele oie 292 2 49 2 052 oe cee A i O Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage li Eduipped iessedcoeaetieeeend andi O Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary WOE BEL soe ve es Gow koa soo eee a ues O Second Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers If Equipped H In Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner 156 W Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment 21544 245044 Sheed tee eee 4 161 156 O Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Operation 162 156 W Cargo Area Features oct ceeds eR mts o Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped m H Cargo Management System
98. 31 TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping control handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Steering Control Handle To unlock the steering column push the control handle downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the control handle upward until fully engaged WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Spee
99. 31407551 Turn Signal Control NOTE If either turn signal indicator has a very fast flash rate check for an inoperative outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved see your authorized dealer for service NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds before activating the flash to pass function again Interior Lights Courtesy Reading Lights Models with Overhead Console These lights are mounted in the overhead console be tween the sun visors They are also located in the headliner above the second row passenger seats Press and release the lens to turn ON or turn OFF the light manually These lights also turn on when you press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter open a door or
100. 34 and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near COOL OR COLD Press the button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If its sunny set the Mode control at or between lt and f then turn the air 65556 conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near and turn T 6 n the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between and SP COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If it is sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between J and 23 In very cold weather 6 if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the amp m 045608611 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Mi Starting Procedures 295 O Key Ignition Park Interlock 299 o Automatic Transaxle 2222 EER EES ER 295 O Brake Transaxle Interlock System H Normal Starting Tip Start v such ar N dd 296 D Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock D Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or DV Sle PP Kt ET eee EE EE PEN EET 296 D Four Speed Or Six Speed AutoStick Of Engine Fails To Start esses 296 Automatic Transaxle 42 256222 on 300 Eier arie oce uranio eee ed eee BEHOOR 207 ad OE TE Mi Engine Block Heater If Equipped 297 Me Pe eg eee ene sees a W Automatic Transaxle 4 298
101. 42 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink
102. 4554545 483 Map ecodine DAYS DES 42244 ptr SPHERE HD PR 129 Marker Lights ide 24 ED HEID R ee ded nd 448 Master Cylinder Brakes lessen 429 hide CEN TTCPECTITTTTTITRUCOPTITTTCTT 354 Mini Trip Computer e ces d Se ons 196 204 lies 42 093 03 95 X3 E Rond eee RS 92 138 Automatic DIMMING s sa deed e Pl Ep a2 Electric Powered 25994 vew wx ew waa das 94 Electric Remote 0 00 94 PETOT ONUN ecu sore 379 9909 09 PERE Ho d 94 els iss 22942454292 es 93 OE FEE OE 95 Outsid AA od oe AE EE EE FEE 93 INCONVIEW 24 4 444444446445 Sou NC Ye EDO ee d 92 cun eT C 95 Mode Fuel Saver ii aie RE 29995 OER EET HR RE 204 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System a sg 48620 e404 4 343 N INDEX 501 Mopot a 2 4655 su 55255546542 DIES IG 407 482 MI Nur 244 reatet hee pss Hees ees 299 MIBL ETBE i999 oes es ee ease ee NS 354 Multi Function Control Lever 119 Navigation Radio Uconnect gps 299 Navigation System Uuconnect gps 195 299 New Vehicle Break In Period 82 Occupant Restraints ss vos gah ea ees 39 61 65 Occupant Restraints Sedan 57 58 61 64 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 352 456 Odometer jig EPI ees eee eee eee 189 195 Oil Change Indicator se rerea cee BOD N 186 204 Oil Change Indicator Reset 42 xa spes 186 204 OIL EOSIN 2393 04 eq fads EOE oo es 409 456 amp ein ues REN SUPPE S SS 454
103. 9 Core as 999 99 3939 9 ER ear 939a 403 Coolant Antifreeze linn 423 456 Sou PED on eon ed ba mopeds ET a 423 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 84 356 Fails to Start SS ee ee 296 Hooded 5tarHng 244442424 ueeuae RE EORR E 296 Fuel Roduemelis perissa 9273 AE DRS ER 352 Jomp DEEG s a datas Sha oe VER eee eee x 392 6 ee ee ee ee ee ee 409 454 456 Oil Change Interval 22259 24594 lt 186 204 410 OM dle A HD 242565430555 0 HR AE 403 404 411 494 INDEX NEE Id CIO 654s EE OT AE ges ae N A12 Oil Filter Disposal aoc 0904 46 Kens pened 412 Oil Selecon usa eta oe ee88S Bo SE ui 410 454 O VNC 2 scekeeus 44525 h 495 Ode 411 go sca MP CPP 82 OQUCINCAIING 2c o ect p eda dario trees atin Hi 380 PLUS usd S BR S HA RR EORR eee ee gae 295 Temperature QUSE sieke RARR READ deb es 181 EE ie Ol VISeOSIDU ou esu dees ooo Se ee HER 411 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 65 Entry System Illuminated eds ow res EDE ee 18 EUNDI ies x22 9 IRSE YU eee SAE RC DER vi 354 Exhaust Gas Caution 39 84 356 421 EXhaust siel 4o5 5 teens BE ES Ecc oa 84 421 Express Down Windows sss 23 Exterior Folding Mitros as sep oped aiad 94 Fxtenor Inet Service vei od n OE RE a p RE ES 448 EF iero Li EE ie d ee ES sone EER ER 85 448 Fabric Care 25e RAI ANS ee hoe ease ete es 437 Filler Location Fuel ee 907 Filters PAP Clenet OE he eee EXE E ED 412 Air Conditioning ii ID isese aha
104. A C On Off 6 AUTO Mode Blower 7 Front MODE 8 RECIRCULATE 9 Front DEFROST 10 Front Blower Speed 11 SYNC 81dc95d4 Three Zone ATC Lower Control Panel Rear Blower Speed 4 Rear ATC Lock 2 Rear Temperature Rear 5 Rear DEFROST System On O 3 Rear MODE NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Automatic Operation 1 Press the AUTO button on the Front Upper ATC Panel and the word AUTO will illuminate in the front ATC display along with three temperatures for driver front passenger and rear seats The system will then automati cally regulate the amount of airflow 2 Next adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver front passen ger and rear seat rotary temperature knobs Once the desired temperature is displayed the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level 3 When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically NOTE e tis not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible e The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer
105. ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 27 Airbag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to six seconds as 9 a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is either not on during starting or stays on or turns on while driving then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Ihings To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 28 Compassl Temperature Display Button If Equipped Operates the Compass Temperature display in the Com pass Mini Trip Computer CMTC display 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compa
106. Anti Lock ADS ie as ehh oie Ghee Abe 315 316 did heck sesse bs oh tardait 429 457 Master Cylinder 424 444 f od ep eos eee ks 429 490 INDEX NEE Id POLOS souse een EERS bg mite a DER RE 311 Wari Eie apere bea ER bas REPRE EE 194 DOLES wa eeg Hare EE EE OE HE See Se Ge 314 429 Brake Transaxle Interlock 299 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 82 Bulb Replacement sd Es ERROR ER RYS reres 447 448 Bibs LIU si aon ctueeace te hoe anes aos 85 447 Calibration Compass isa wes ves iiev s ee es 199 207 Camera Rear 6 0 6 24 4656 pre HE DG b aes 135 Copacites Fld s v saca dq oa F9 ees ony DER Ki 454 Caps Filler 10 P 357 UNEMCING 3 2 beL IESU sa es 403 404 411 Power let sie Ee ED ROEP RAD ee RR 311 Radiator Coolant Pressure 426 Car Washes 25 45 4446649536 6 5544824605 IE 434 Carbon Monoxide Warning 84 356 Cardo Area COVEI ugue aur Rae bo t bdo dos 166 Cargo Area Fedtuies ts BETREE DE E oe SS 163 Cargo Compartment sses i444 504 sea oto ed 163 LD uas Se ie ERGE tee ee eee 126 163 Eie de AE PA eae es abe dans os 171 CORO ESSE 3 5 4 ux a Eua IE IE PRSE PE 126 Cargo Lodd FOOT va SEER OR EER AAR DA an 164 Cargo Management System se se se se se 164 Rollaway Tonneau Cover see 166 Tri Fold Load ODE oa v e ye a ose ea dep ad vesc 164 Cargo TIesDOWES seir aci a epit re et Re tds 165 Cargo Vehicle Loading issie o mb het 164 359 CD Compact Disc Player
107. BOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system This system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node WIN with integral ignition switch You can insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch with either side up Wireless Ignition Node WIN The Wireless Ignition Node WIN operates similarly to an ignition switch It has four operating positions three of which are detented and one spring loaded The de tented positions are LOCK ACC and ON The START position is a spring loaded momentary contact position When released from the START position the switch automatically returns to the detented ON position Wireless Ignition Node WIN LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY 3 ON 4 START N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Key Fob The Key Fob operates the ignition switch It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and an emergency key which stores in the rear of the Key Fob The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking To remove the emergency key slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand 020207436 Emergency Key Removal NOTE e You can insert the double sided emergency key into the lock cylinder with either side u
108. Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury LATCH Child Seat Anchor System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s second row passenger seats are equipped with the child restraint anchor system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchors and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchors are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchors will continue to have features for installation using the vehicle s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 connection to the top tether anchors have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retrofit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child re straint in a
109. D U L E S 8 N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 463 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 464 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using yo
110. D OPERATING ee Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire TIRE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for high zits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 EE STARTING AND OPERATING 329 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflatio
111. DING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and fold
112. EGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min utes of continuous operation then change the transaxle fluid and filter according to the interval specified for 376 STARTING AND OPERATING ee police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to AutoStick If Equipped Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance E Lm MAN SN By using the AutoStick modes and selecting a specific gear range frequent shifting can be avoided The NOTE Check the four speed transaxle fluid level before highest gear range should be selected that allows for towing The six speed transaxle is sealed and the fluid adequate performance For example choose 4 if the level cannot be checked See your authorized dealer for desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if assistance needed to maintain the desired speed Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to prevent excess heat generation A reduction in vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving at When using the speed control if you experience speed high RPM Return to a higher gear range or vehicle drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until speed when road conditions and RPM level allows you can get back to cruising speed Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 377 Coolin
113. EHICLE M Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main WARNING tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 Disposal of Used Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to dete
114. G YOUR VEHICLE 37 Reset It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the Auto up Auto down feature To do so perform the following steps 1 Pull the window switch up to close window com pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed 2 Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked or locked with the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switch located on either front door trim panel NOTE The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with the manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or the door lock cylinder on the driver s door To op
115. High Low Beam Switch idem RES 125 o Flash To Pass s ake EE ORE Oo de 2 125 EIDIeHoFLIgHS uiuos id ROK v ae BEE 125 N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 133 El Battery Saver bele Ese EA GER Feds O Cargo Light ll Windshield Wipers And Washers o Windshield Wiper Operation D Intermittent Wiper System o Windshield Washers O Mist Feature o Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only li Tilt Telescoping Steering Column If Foppe d sie se e RR boone ll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped D To Activate o To Set a Desired Speed 126 D To Deactivate o To Resume Speed o To Vary The Speed Setting o To Accelerate For Passing ll Parkview Rear Back Up Camera If EID DOO s s oh et ne mra dh t HA RUE ORE SA D Turning Parkview On Or Off With Navigation Multimedia Radio D Turning Parkview On Or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio Bl Overhead Console O Courtesy Reading Lights O Sunglasses Storage D Interior Observation Mirror 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME O Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped 138 B Closing Sunroof Manually 146 lll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 138 oO Closing Sunroof Express 146 O Programming HomeLink 140 Edik Protect Peature soe ana serm one os 146 O Gate Operator Canadian Programming 142 HPinch Protect Override sese y wes RD oe
116. IO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and
117. Jump Starting Procedure WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion CAUTION Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery WARNING Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the boos
118. K switch or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter NOTE The system will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door LOCK plungers or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver s door 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Close all doors The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash to signal that the system is arming During this period opening any door or the liftgate will cancel the arming process NOTE For added security whenever the Security Alarm is armed the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped is disabled as well To Disarm the System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position NOTE e Unlocking the doors with the manual door LOCK plungers or the door LOCK cylinder on the driver s door will not disarm the system e When the system is armed the interior power door LOCK switches will not unlock the doors The Security Alarm system is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm If the previously described arming sequence has occurred the system will arm regardless of whether you are inside or outside the vehicle If you remain inside the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the system Tamper Alert If something has triggered the alarm in
119. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of this vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if the vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test the vehicle may fail the test For states that require an Inspection and Mainte This vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if this vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert the ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn the ignition key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will fla
120. N 119 124 183 450 UCLCOBUSOLOE iis mee RR eos ceases d 265 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 96 253 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 0 485 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 265 Universal Serial Bus USB Port 209 N INDEX 509 Universal Iransmitier sis su SE ie 45444624003 138 Unleaded Gasoline ss ie eee dope ee ies 392 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 47 Upholstery Cale 242066 cheb ahs HE KERR eee 437 EE DO osse rr 299 VAIO V sv ecce d dune QUE edd dp Pes orici 95 Variance COMPASS seks RA ke e bur 08405 198 208 Vehicle Certification Label dues esce RYP 959 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle oadife sesse heh ood ea ERE 331 359 360 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Veliele SOng P 288 447 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 17 Video Entertainment System Rear Seat Video Systemi sie og ke BEER bo E 263 Viscosity Eng me OIl kote esa Cees Ged EIE ES 411 Voice Recognition System VR 96 Warning Flasher Hazard 22 9 p ERES 380 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 181 Warnings and Cautions s esc ed eR n kis 6 Warranty Information a utat aiio de RENE 482 Washer Adding PIU 38 sueta RE REKE DRR was 420 Washers Windshield 126 129 420 Washing Vehicle 3 a aues ess ener E PIE Sd 434 Water Die Toud 4 auc aries DRR cade i 307 Wheeland VV heel ITIM es e oge 4 93
121. NG AND OPERATING 295 STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transaxle Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear belts CAUTION WARNING Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving precautions are not observed unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other controls or move the ve hicle Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal 296 STARTING AND OPERATING M Normal Starting Tip Start NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing t
122. ON or OFF appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Variance under Compass Display Calibrate Compass Refer to Manual Compass Calibration under Com pass Display MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate amp DISC MP3 WHA 042005200 REO Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes th
123. OPERATING 335 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 336 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Afte
124. OT 3 brake Automatic Transaxle Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recommended brake fluids MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Trans mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi Emissions Control System Maintenance 460 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 460 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 460 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the
125. Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this fe
126. QUIPPED WARNING The power sunroof switch is located between the sun visors on the overhead console e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow your fingers other body parts or Power sunroof Switch any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Opening Sunroof Manually Press and hold the switch in the rearward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the rearward position the sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release and the sunroof will open automatically from any position The sunroof will open fully and then stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof sw
127. Reset Position NOTE e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the head restraints see an authorized dealer e For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 BeltAlert Programming The BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by performing the following steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 With all doors closed and the ignition switch in any position except ON or START buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not
128. SID O Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite eel 4 igu es ee nse T AE EE OE SETS O Satellite Antenna 000006 O Reception Quality uuu eee ese hoo es O Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode D Operating Instructions Uconnect phone If Equipped NN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 241 W Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M O Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped sae tu Res 263 ll Uconnect Multimedia Sirius Backseat TV excuso P 263 ll Video Entertainment System VES If EQUIDDCGs iss den AA AE EA DEER IE 263 Bl Universal Consumer Interface UCI If POQUIDDCCs ss EDE ou FT EN OPERE RES 265 O Connecting The iPod Device 265 O Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons 265 E Dies Mode stuns we ord eg qe Eie oes BER 266 El SEG Browse Mod 2393 usd READ as s 267 lll Remote Sound System Controls If Equipped 269 O Right Hand Switch Functions 269 O Left Hand Switch Functions For Radio OPRANO a se hou enone 6 egies ee eens O Left Hand Switch Functions For Media i e CD Operation B CD DVD Disc Maintenance ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones Bl Climate Controls o Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System D Three Zone Manual Air Conditioning And Heating Systems If Equip
129. Salen Exhaust Gas sare si dena TO p ESAE de 39 84 Safety Information Tire spes wes EER due ks 324 DAG MIDS aise coe EE OR OE TEE 83 Satelite Radio Antenna Lua cates cep oe ad DRA RE 209 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 253 254 258 263 Schedule Maintenance len 460 Seat Belt Maintenance 006 439 beat Belt Reminder 2 15h pea oh bees 52 Seat Bells in 20 3 bake oe ERO RNC RES 39 41 85 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 46 And Pregnant Women sesseepreiniiss ei 53 Child Restraint 00 70 71 74 80 Eerder 44442455 45686646 3 559425504682 54 Front Seat series PEER HER ERROR ERS RS 41 42 Igor eno MP D 85 Operating Instructions 2 RR 42 PECtCNSIONCIS a cedat Sh 9 9 509 9 Pots iai weeds 48 edi CA amp ate 5hb bees oe abv Gey DERE hs ae 41 ISencdet sa aus SEED ER NS a REESE A 184 Untwisting Procedure 4 526 mne 47 vo fines bees oes bees ous 96 lS ENE soe Soie boi EE gana ER EDE OOS 96 CIBO DOoSIOE 23 5 espe EP URE a DE Goes 72 OE AE ie ETT m 112 Heed 2 230924 99979 2t 9 c9 UC qat 2 EE REOS os 106 Height Adjustment 4 os ace gre does ase 100 102 Lombar SUpport 2243 sap de de abr de Rowe 99 Bo 102 Rear PONS eke EE ena ES PSP Red 108 115 Re ls aus aaoe oS oa sa ESPRIT ERG EES 98 Iechni g eat 22445 see AE bene een es 110 115 N INDEX 505 Seatback Release Tilting 100 108 115 102 Security Alarm Theft Alarm
130. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around the child s lap 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on 9 To release the seat belt push the red button on the the hips and as snug as possible buckle 7 Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click WEANING Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat 022605394 e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat 8 To remove the slack from the lap belt pull upward on the shoulder portion of the seat belt e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or WARNING slouching can move the belt out of position e Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a coll
131. Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man ner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean damp cloth and remove the stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth
132. State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC equipped vehicles Oil Change Required will be dis played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary On Non EVIC equipped vehicles Change Oil will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating that an oil change is necessary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicles oil N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 461 if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even At Each Stop for Fuel if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumi e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a peto fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the vehicle off road for an extended period of time accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when l the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Under
133. Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your handheld transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 successfully accepted the frequency signal The indica tor light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener gate operator Security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming HomeLink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels w
134. T PANEL M CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES isasingle CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner NE UNDERSTAN
135. TE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using
136. TION e When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be tween 1st and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result Continued WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 CAUTION Continued e Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no transmission shifting occurring WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M CAUTION Towing this vehicle using any other method could TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key Front Wheel Drive FWD Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available a wheel lift towing vehicle may be used Furthermore rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxle damage can result If rear towing is the only alternative a front end
137. TUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button n
138. Tether for CHildren The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Integrated Child Booster Seat If Equipped The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each outboard second row passenger seat The Booster Seat is designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 Ibs 22 and 39 Kg and between 47 in 119 cm and 57 in 145 cm tall To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat follow these steps 1 Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to use the Integrated Child Booster Seat NOTE The second row bench with Integrated Child Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during use 2 Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and seat cushion THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 N Baw mm AR L N Foe 022607263 Release Loop Booster Seat 3 Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock itin the 4 Place the child upright in the seat with their back booster seat position firmly against the seatback 5 Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt 6
139. The Three Zone Temperature Control bottom panel con trols rear Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations 045607739 Three Zone Manual Lower Climate Control Rear Zone Instrument Panel Control 1 RR Rear Control ON 2 Rear Blower OFF 3 Rear Blower Speed 4 Rear Temperature The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel Rear Manual Climate Control Overhead The Three Zone Temperature Control bottom panel has five positions off rear and a range of blower speeds Only when the primary control for the rear blower is in the rear RR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 81dc6d95 Rear Manual Climate Control Overhead 3 Rear Climate Control Lock 4 Rear MODE Rear Blower 2 Rear Temperature Rear Blower Control The primary control for the rear blower is on the front climate control unit located on the instrument panel Only when the front control for the rear blower is in the RR position do the second row seat occupants have control of the rear blower speed The rear blower control located in the rear overhead console has an off position and a range of blower speeds This allows the second row seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle When the blower knob on the Three Zone Manual
140. The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit If Auto Unlock is enabled this feature will unlock all the doors when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information The doors will unlock automatically if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transaxle was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transaxle is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver s door is opened N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Place the Key Fob in the ignition switch 3 Within 15 seconds cycle the ignition swi
141. Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the hour highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 7 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Minutes and then press and release the joystick 8 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to set the minutes highlighted on the clock on the screen Press and release the joystick when done 9 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the screen when the system is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Clock if Radio off and then press and release the joystick to change the current setting A check mark will display next to Clock if Radio off when the feature is selected 5 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Uconnect Multimedia SATELLI
142. a f E 7 Pe a L j E j p L Ed 4 J A l I T o i 1 if b Wt 1 i 1 LE Er i ML eS i Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap 2 Remote Negative Post Remote Battery Posts 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when tab and pull upward on the cover ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the N ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Locking Tab 4 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result
143. a stop in any gear except top gear The system will ignore attempts to upshift into top gear at too low of a vehicle speed sixth for six speed fourth for four speed If a ratio other than first is selected and the vehicle is brought to a stop the transaxle control logic will automatically select the first gear ratio Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or icy conditions Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged The transaxle will automatically shift up when maxi mum engine speed is reached while AutoStick is engaged Transaxle shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to the rev limit the transaxle will automatically select the next higher ratio If a downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine 306 STARTING AND OPERATING M e Mostly the transaxle will stay in the manually selected ratio however If the system detects powertrain overheating the transaxle will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off If the system detects a problem it will disable the AutoStick mode and the transaxle will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD IF EQUIPPED This feature provides on demand All Wheel Drive AWD The system is automatic with no driver inputs o
144. ack Up sist sto kke rane Cane hte POP 450 Palely awe vues vage GERIG ER ear eves 126 Brake Assist Warning iss WER o Ie ers 193 323 Drake NORS oats ot v ope 23 3 993 99 PERE 194 Bulb Replacement 21 2925 4 5 4 9 4 48 4 3 9 VER RAPS 448 COCO 126 Courtesy Reading si 444454 EE REEDE EE 125 mor m 188 Daytime RUNNING 3 454 EERS DE bane eed ed x 123 Dimmer Switch Headlight 119 125 Electronic Stability Program ESP EO ses oe Pure coe HER ORE 193 321 323 N INDEX 499 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 167 Mop Tende 2 029 ene SERE URS ER bee 125 lig 85 Oil Pressure m 188 MEET ET ed 123 182 449 loo PTT 119 120 448 Hazard Warning Flasher poU PASSING ssaeeo8an A EE eee RR S basa d 125 Hl adlehboWIM dose eek Eas 11120 Rear DOVNE 553 or R be ra x95 448 450 Heade NiS D RES HR Ee 120 448 Red Ta EE TE EE EE EET 450 Headlights On Reminder x 22s 2d Emu 123 peau Delt Reminder a sce qq ee heres HAD epa 184 Headlights On With Wipers 121 130 Service 44 bb doe eh eo ER X Eee ee rad 447 448 PUGH Bed 93 v 93 9 Sew S e ds 125 183 448 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 192 tiek bean IndiealoE s v2 64 Hai Bri ici n 183 DIGG Marker S a 2448 Sri qp HE Rede Gas 448 High Beam Low Beam Select 125 Tire Pressure Monitoring IPMS 189 343 Mumingted LOUY vs tenes cece hess RT Ed 18 T
145. activated NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then most warnings will display in the EVIC For further information refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen ter EVIC in Understanding Your Instrument Panel ECO ECO on Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO on indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO on depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se gASCAP Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard Then press the TRIP ODOM ETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL LoW tirE When the appropriate tire pressure is low the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles
146. ae S RUE 367 Recreational SARA ERROR ER tase 3 7 lr oq e a RR E E Sarg 367 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home 377 dae x39 9932 29 9 SEE PERS LE RS EE 307 Traction Control 24665445445 RES RE 192 319 Trailer Sway Control ISC 1 440246 56e6394 323 508 INDEX MM Age TOWNS wes eeu he HORE ee oe eee ee aes 361 Cooling Systemi Tips 2e RED bee Honey en a 377 ii di PP 366 Minimum Requirements 23 urb 370 MNOS ses AE ROER LS S pur ddr du A PEE 375 Trailer and Tongue Weight 369 WINS soos ER ESSE AUS P SR EUER dna 373 Trailer Towing Guide is RAAR ARS RA dE eR 367 Trailer Mel duos Sadur ware subs S RSS ERE 367 Transaxle POCUIVES 4486 oa EE TE DEE OE OE 433 ALONE oeste Eelt AX S4 RA S HI h 298 431 wii 304 Igi AMD c r 433 Eis C gas FEE 431 Ope OR 4 93 1 90 ae Ed ee REDES OE SS 298 8 Pr m 302 DelecHon or Lubricant a esos ed od S RE ERES 457 Transmission As bes Aa abeo ER E See Transaxle Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry ses oes Ee ge ED Rods 23 Transmitter Garage Door Opener LlomeLimE s sg 4564408248 ARE heh EEG 138 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry ups eins 19 Transmitter Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Transporting Pets i4 de 4 neki d ded yd Sra 82 Tread Wear Indicators lesus 999 Tap EOUPEIER aco eri o RO op 9 4 oe oe Ee 196 TUP OOE Pr 184 Trip Odometer Reset Button 189 195 lote ie ai PNE ND M Q
147. ag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON position If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light in the instrument panel for approxi N mately four to six seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is noted The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru
148. ake firmly push the park brake pedal fully To release the parking brake press the park brake pedal a second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake disengage Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transaxle is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake WARNING Continued should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake WARNING failure and an accident Always fully apply the parking brake when leav e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for d Crete d j
149. ake Assist System BAS Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The malfunction light for the Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP is combined with Brake Assist System BAS The yellow ESP BAS Warning Light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS Warning ESP BAS Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see an authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 26 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disenga
150. al Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transaxle is in PARK Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set tings displays in the EVIC Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following choices Language When in this display you may select one of three lan guages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions and the navigation system if equipped Press the RESET button while in this display to select English French or Spanish Then as you continue the informa tion will display in the selected language NOTE The EVIC will not change the Uconnect lan guage selection Auto UNLK On Exit When ON is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver s door is opened To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee RKE Unlock When Driver Door 1st Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger doors and liftgate When All Doors 1st Press is selected all doors and the liftgate will unlock on the first press of the RKE UN LOCK button To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Dr
151. all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The
152. and shoulder belts for all seating positions e All seat belt systems except the driver s include e Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen i Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the ger 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on sh
153. ane le act tessi 380 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the instrument panel switch bank above the climate controls A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put the transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear co
154. ansaxle remains either with a flatbed truck or with the front wheels in NEUTRAL Front Wheel Drive FWD Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL off the ground All Wheel Drive AWD Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions e The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M e The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles towing is the only alternative a front end dolly must be 25 km used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent e The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h damage to the vehicle and both front and rear wheels must be on the ground All Wheel Drive AWD The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all CAUTION four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle CAUTION failure Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transaxle is not Towing this vehicle using any other method could operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be transported on transmission Such damage is not covered by the a flatbed truck New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With A Tow Dolly Front Wheel Drive FWD Rear towing is not recommended with the front wheels on the ground as transaxl
155. arket side steps or running boards It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Continued ries may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabili ties contact your authorized dealer 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to 9 inflate for your protection in a collision While the airbag system is designed to be mainte nance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system immediately e The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for approximately four to six seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON e The light remains on after the approximate four to six second interval e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The airbags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper airbag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param
156. artment Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken from its mount ing Do not store it in the vehicle REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper Washer The rear window wiper washer control is located on the right side of the steering column NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at CAUTION 036407502 e Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an Rear Window Wiper Washer Control automatic car wash Damage to the rear wiper may N Rotate the switch upward to the On position will result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on activate the rear wiper position Rotate the switch upward to the washer position Continued will activate that rear washer The washer pump 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately e In cold weather always turn off the rear wiper 10 minutes switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the park position before turning off the engi
157. as e une 9 ovo do oe ma x 168 Rearview Mirrors is seed Eu Rue ii ER SP y es 92 Reclining Fout DOdES sai spe bi cee pis eines 98 Reclining Rear Seats 45 44 4034 20 19484443 110 115 Recreational TOWNE 4 3 633 90 PR RARR HER eas 377 Ketormulated Gasoline 2453 41 4244045624ues 353 ReMiSCIOnE sprer arei eat HD Gene ee aes 415 Release Hood eee 117 kender Ties lua pde qr vd tee SEDES 123 Reminder Seat Belt 2251s os RR a 52 Remote Control Starting SUSCI ka one KAAR HEAD aba 25 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 269 Remote Starting System xe suck sonde de HER 29 Replacement BUDS cce vare Poe t od GER ED xS 447 Replacement Keys jb cous cS een ce deg nebaera 4 16 Replacement PariS S ose soe chimes oa ba as 407 Replacement Tires 22243449 ex RS RS 340 Reporting Satety Detects ss quee mecs cue RARR 482 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 186 204 Restraint Head eee 103 Restraints Child iei REG DES BARE obo oH a RE 70 Restraints Occupant duas XoobxCS S EER RO OR ee 39 Retractable Cargo Area Cover ii iss t es 166 Reverse DIO DES eperera PRAK LESER EE ie 450 504 INDEX NEE Id Rocking Vehicle When Stuck sos 396 Roof Rack Luggage Rack 171 Rotation Tires vac bud bars a Xo x ee HES n 342 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle aoc 2464 sette 85 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 85 Safety Defects Reporting 44 45 egre RES eas 482
158. at To Do In Emergencies for further information NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 297 If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of the vehicle WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up 208 STARTING AND OPERATING M AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE NOTE You
159. ate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M J 4 Requested by police under a legal warrant Otherwise required by law Data parameters that are recorded Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Vehicle speed Engine RPM Brake switch status Pedal position And other parameters depending on vehicle configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
160. ature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savi
161. aution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with an electric defroster Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Seat Belt Maintenance FUSES Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or This center contains fuses and relays lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to T wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue Cleaning The Cupholders Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent m RAGE Totally Inte
162. axle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions i e in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 5 range will improve perfor mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up D Overdrive Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However select the 3 range when frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the D Overdrive range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions ie in hilly ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up 3 Drive Four Speed Transaxle This range eliminates shifts into D Overdrive The transaxle will operate normally in first second and third gear while in this range The 3 Drive range should also be used when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress NOTE Using the 3 Drive range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shift
163. bag inflates in about 30 ms about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain airbag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain airbag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed NOTE In a rollover the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle Front and Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Ad ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag deployment and provide verification Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is remo
164. bined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 lbs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 332 STARTING AND OPERATING ee available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capaci ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg STARTING AND OPERATING Combined weight of AVAILABLE TOTAL FRONT REAR occupants and cargo MINUS Combined Occupant s Cargo Luggage and from Tire Placard weigh
165. ble To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver 362 STARTING AND OPERATING M Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous
166. ble Hold the spare upright so that the tire s tread is on the ground and the valve stem is at the top of the wheel and facing away from the rear of the vehicle it through the center of the wheel Then place the spare tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle Spare Tire Retainer E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 387 5 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut Rotate the jack handle assembly clockwise to raise WARNING Continued the spare tire into the storage area Continue to rotate the Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to jack handle assembly until you hear the winch mecha be raised nism click three times It cannot be over tightened Push Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely transmission in PARK in place Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Jacking Instructions WARNINCG Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Conti
167. cali bration The message CAL will display in the EVIC 5 Slowly complete one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message turns off The compass will now function normally 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and geographic North To allow the compass module to compensate for that difference and ensure accuracy you can set the variance in the compass module to the zone where the vehicle is located according to the Compass Variance Map To set the variance perform the following steps NOTE e The default variance setting is Zone 8 When setting the variance the numbering will wrap around from Zone 15 to Zone 1 e Magnetic materials should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel as this is where the compass sensor is located 7 8 Compass Variance Map 040506040 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 3 Press the SCROLL button until COMPASS VARI ANCE message and the last variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release RESET button until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map 5 Press and release the COMPASS TEMPERATURE button to exit Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Person
168. cated at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 Windshield Wiper Operation NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for park position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while low speed wiper operation they are operating The wipers will resume operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for When you turn the ignition switch back to the ON position CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than OFF high speed wiper operation In cold weather always turn OFF the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning OFF the engine If the wiper switch is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted 031507503 Front Wiper Control Continued 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Continued e Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the park position If the windshield wiper control is turned OFF a
169. cation NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN See INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl A Word About Your Keys 12 o Wireless Ignition Node WIN 12 Mey POR acxcceas oo Patch dea eio de 19 E Tip Start Peatufe 223 0 9 209 BAR BP SE DRR SIR 14 O Removing Key FOB From Ignition 14 O Key In Ignition Reminder 15 sod ARE EE EN HEN si 15 El Replacement Kers soas cues nance osama 16 H Customer Key Programming 17 O General Information li Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped B Rearming Of The System o To Arm The System H To Disarm The System B illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE o To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate o To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Using The Pare Man ead a Re AS LE 23 O Remote Open Window Featuree 23 O Programming Additional Transmitters 29 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 23 O General Information 2222s vbt Rue 25 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 25 O How To Use Remote Start 2er sis 2D NI OOPLOSKS Q
170. ccupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Manual Front Seat Adjustments The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward Release the bar once the seat is in ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 the position desired Using body pressure move forward WARNING its WARNING and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is ey i dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Manual Seat Adjustment 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean forward slightly lift the lever lean back to the desired position and release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright position lean forward and lift the lever Release the lever once th
171. ce 90 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter _J Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Ci Rotate tires replace if necessary 7 Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary d Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped _1 Inspect and replace PCV valve if Inspect the CV joints necessary Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 471 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or 102 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires _1 Replace the spark plugs 3 5L Engine _I Replace the timing belt 3 5L Engine L1 Flush and replace the engine coolant Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Servic
172. ch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate I me CIE LE DISC i SINC C MPs PUSH AUDIO SELECT 042305232 RES Radio Operating Instructions
173. cle can carry Tire Placard Location ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the com
174. ct Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Daylight Savings and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Off or On and then press and release the joystick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Setting the User Clock If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the system clock you can manually adjust the time by performing the following NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 If User Time has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to User Time and then press and release the joystick NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 5 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Set Hours and then press and release the joystick 6
175. ct the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light 346 STARTING AND OPERATING e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicl
176. d Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling Failure to follow this warning may result in seri ous injury or death NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started A loose improperly installed or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the MIL Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 VEHICLE LOADING The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the Vehicle Certification Label This information should b
177. d Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push and release the ON OFF button located on the end of the speed control lever The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push and release the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off Be sure to turn the system off when it is not in use NOTE The Electronic Speed Control System will auto matically turn off when the engine is turned OFF N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle reaches the speed desired press down ward on the lever to SET DECEL and release Release the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE e The vehicle must be traveling at least 25 mph 40 km h for the speed control to set e The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the lever to SET DECEL
178. d Restraint in the event of an accident and could result in serious injury or e Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury death Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they or death in the event of a collision The head are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is se cured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops Failure to follow Continued this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed restraints should always be checked prior to oper ating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i Second Row Passenger Seats These head non removable restraints are non adjustable and Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger Models These head restraints are non adjustable and non removable However you can fold them forward when they are not in use by passengers Refer to 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature for further information WARNING Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat without having the head restraint unfolded and locked in place Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury to the passen
179. d Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems If Equipped e Front Two and Three Zone ATC allows both driver and front passenger seat occupant and rear seat occupants to select individual comfort settings ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 e Occupants in the vehicle select AUTO mode operation by a button press on the right rotary knob and a comfort temperature setting using rotary knobs on the control unit e The system can be controlled manually if desired e SYNC feature links the controls for all three zones allowing one comfort setting for the cabin if desired The Two and Three Zone ATC System automatically maintain the interior comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers The system automatically adjusts the 81d198cc air temperature the airflow volume amount of outside Two Zone ATC air recirculation and the airflow direction This maintains 1 System On Off 7 Front MODE a comfortable temperature even under changing condi 2 Left Front Temperature Electric Rear Window De roster Button tions 3 Display Screen 9 Front DEFROST 4 Right Front Temperature 10 Front Blower Speed 5 Air Conditioning A C 11 AUTO Mode Blower On Off 6 RECIRCULATE 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81f4d61d Three Zone ATC 1 System On Off 2 Left Front Temperature 3 Display Screen 4 Right Front Temperature 5 Air Conditioning
180. d rear passengers sitting next to a win dow If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags they are located above the side windows and their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If the vehicle is equipped with Supple mental Side Seat Airbags they are marked with an airbag label sewn into the outboard side of the seat NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Airbag System Components The airbag system consists of the following Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Airbag Warning Light Driver Front Airbag Front Passenger Airbag Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraint for Driver and Front Passenger Front and Side Impact Sensors Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolster Front Seat Belt Pretensioners if equipped e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped e Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped Advanced Front Airbag Features The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver and front passenger airbags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the impact sensors at the front of the car The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
181. d track three times to listen to the third track and so forth e Press the button located in the center of the switch to change to the next preset that you have programmed CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommend
182. ditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations and e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 317 WARNING Continued e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that af These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING e The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interference can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capa bility Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop Continued forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro
183. dolly must be used Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle All Wheel Drive AWD The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four Wheels On The Ground CAUTION e If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ON position not in the LOCK or ACC position Continued N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 CAUTION Continued e rr to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles e Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front with sling type towing equipment Damage to the The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h CAUTION front fascia will result e Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans axle may result Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transaxle failure Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If the transaxle is not If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than while being towed the key must be in the ON position 15 miles 25 km the vehicle must be transported not the ACC position Make certain the tr
184. driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control Electronic Refer to Electronic Brake Control System Trailer Sway Control TSC in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer Sway Control Mechanical The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing system works by applying lever age through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer t
185. dure UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 16 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Warning Light If Equipped This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check Je when the ignition switch is turned ON This light will also turn on while the engine is running if there is a problem with the Elec tronic Throttle Control ETC system If the light turns on while the engine is running safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible place the shift lever in PARK and cycle the ignition key The light should turn off If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable However see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running immediate service is required In this case you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Also have the system checked by an authorized dealer if the light does not turn on during starting 17 Oil Pressure Warning Light wi This light shows low engine oil pressure The light will turn on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the LOCK or ACC position to the ON position The light will turn off after the engine is started If the light does not turn on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on and remains on while dri
186. during an impact that requires airbag deployment The timing of the second stage determines whether the output force is low medium or high If a low output is sufficient to meet the need the remaining gas in the inflator is expended NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Supplemental Side Seat Airbags If Equipped Supplemental side seat airbags provide enhanced protec e No objects should be placed over or near the tion and work together with supplemental Side Airbag airbag on the instrument panel because any such Inflatable Curtains SABIC to help protect an occupant objects could cause harm if the vehicle is ina crash during a side impact severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc 81ddd8b6 Seat Mounted Side Airbag Label 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each bag deploys independently that is a left side impact deploys the le
187. e s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pres sures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition switch is cycled this NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 347 seguence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPMS sensors 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressu
188. e Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 472 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service 114 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter Replace the engine air cleaner filter J Rotate tires Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Change Rear Drive Assembly RDA fluid Change Power Transfer Case PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle and fluid Replace the accessory drive belt 2 4L Engine Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper loosenes
189. e This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 308 STARTING AND OPERATING M Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any
190. e passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 To Fold the Seat 3 Lift the control lever with the other hand allow the seatback to move forward slightly and then release the lever WARNING 1 Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of the seat Catan RA To prevent personal injury or damage to objects keep your head arms and objects out of the folding path of the seatback 4 Gently guide the seatback into the folded position To Unfold the Seat Raise the seatback and lock it in place WARNING Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into Seatback Release position Otherwise the seat will not provide the 2 Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle proper stability for child seats and or passengers An pressure improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward Release Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is the lever once the seat is in the position desired Then dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could using body pressure move forward and rearward on the cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched adjusted properly and y
191. e seatback is in the upright position 8101963 Seatback Release NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 WARNINCG e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked desired Lumbar Support If Equipped The control lever is on the outboard side of the seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase the lumbar support or upward to decrease the lumbar support as Lumbar Control 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Driver s Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If Equipped The control lever is located on the outboard side of the This feature allows for extended cargo space When the seat Raise the lever to raise the seat Lower the lever to seat is folded flat it is an extension of the load floor lower the seat The total seat travel is approximately surface allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up 2 15 in 55 mm to the instrument panel The fold flat seatback also has a cs hardback surface that
192. e Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven brakes when you need them and could have an pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer har accident ness and connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 374 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn ao 9 0 cot aon 057003765 Seven Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes STARTING AND OPERATING 375 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transaxle The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range select the 3 range for four speed automatic or the 5 range for six speed automatic NOTE Using the 3 or 5 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transaxle life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking If you R
193. e acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 A new engine may consume some oil during its first few WARNING Continued thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts SAFETY TIPS Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly preted as an indication of difficulty Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO On seven passenger models do not drive the AREA vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the easy entry exit position seat cushion flipped up ward and seat moved forward as this position is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury On seven pa
194. e button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the
195. e center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Daytime Running Lights If Equipped Fog Lights If Equipped The high beam headlights will turn on as Daytime O To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking Running Lights DRL and operate at DRL lower inten lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the sity whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running end of the multifunction lever the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The DRL s will turn off automatically when the turn signal is in operation and turn on again when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned to the LOCK position a continuous chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened 031407550 Front Fog Light 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever upward or downward and the corresponding turn signal indicator on the instru ment panel will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights 0
196. e damage can result If rear MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 2 4L 403 N Engine Compartment 3 5L 00 404 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 405 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 405 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance OES vi ve idea uud e V RE ES HE E 406 B Replacement Parts 004 407 W Dealer Service o sere rb EE ET OE 407 Bl Maintenance Procedures 408 EUBUgIBe Ol ay sas oe ge ped dog HER e does 409 HEngite Ol Pier a a o4 24354 4 dad ex hat 412 O Engine Air Cleaner Milter c vam oe is oy eax 412 O Maintenance Free Battery ess ey d 413 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 0 A C Air Filter If Equipped Ody Dek ie HOOP 5 2 scar rie troie doe ae PRES 417 Wiper Blades CP 418 B Adding Washer Fluid 0 420 402 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M O Exhaust Syste as 23989932 n4 e056 RS 421 EGGO S SICH ogie iN ELS ERAS OR 423 A Brake cic C T 429 B Automatic Transaxle is vaso rk ees 431 D Appearance Care And Protection From COMOSION s ne ees i eed e ea awe td e ae 434 O Cleaning The Cupholdets 55 REG 439 nc M Tr coe eee EE ST EE ees 439 O Totally Integrated Power Module 439 W Vehicle Storage 447 W Replacement Bulbs 447 B Bulb Replacement 204 448 O Low Beam Headlamp High Beam Headlamp Front Turn Signal Park Lamp olde Marker
197. e event of a rear impact The Active Head Restraint push button To lower the head restraint press the push should be adjusted so the top of the head restraint is button located at the base of the head restraint and push located above the top of your ear downward on the head restraint 030907652 030907490 Adjusted Head Restraint Push Button 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted forward and backward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull outward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE e The head restraints should only be removed by quali fied technicians for service purposes only If either of f the head restraints require removal see your autho RT TERS rized dealer Active Head Restraint Normal Position NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re WARNING Continued straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Starting Your Vehicle for further information Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the WARNING operation of the Active Hea
198. e graphic in the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for three seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the TPMS Telltale light will turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept an
199. e less than 35 ft 11 m from the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system Remote Open Window Featuree This feature allows you to remotely lower both front door windows at the same time To use this feature press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter and then immediately press and hold the UNLOCK button until the windows lower to the level desired or until they lower completely Programming Additional Transmitters Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE e Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate e Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board 1 Battery access is through a door located on the rear of the Key Fob Insert a small flat blade screwdriver into the slot and gently pry open the access door 021305151 Battery Replacement 1 Battery Access Door 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 3 Reposition the access door panel ov
200. e manufacturer s authorized deal ers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 480 This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the Manufacturer s Cus tomer Center Any communication to the Manufacturer s Customer Center should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 4568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 N FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 481 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have heari
201. e out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channel
202. e recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on the engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Com partment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oil Do not add any supplemental materials other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engi neered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives 412 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately disca
203. e steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 311 Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not reguired The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transaxle in PARK 312 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel To apply the park br
204. e the tempera ture The REAR temperature settings are displayed in the front upper ATC panel NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 When rear controls are locked by the front system the LOCK symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead adjustments are ignored Rear Mode Control Auto Mode The rear system automatically maintains the correct mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occu pants Headliner Mode Air comes from the outlets in the headliner Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow Bi Level Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Pa J Air comes from the floor outlets Operating Tips NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather condi tions Summer Operation The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating Refer to Cooling System 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NN under Maintenance Procedures and to Fluids Lubri cants and Gen
205. e tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the righ
206. e used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR or the Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front e Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc
207. eading when the engine is restarted CAUTION Do not leave your vehicle unattended with the en gine running as you would not be able to react to the temperature indicator light if the engine overheats 2 Fuel Gauge The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in the tank when ignition switch is in the ON position 3 Fuel Cap Indicator This symbol indicates the side of the vehicle lt where the fuel filler cap is located 4 Coolant Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi nD a tion If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M idle the vehicle If the temperature reading does not WARNING return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your NOTE As the coolant temperature gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H In this case the indicator light will flash continuously and a continuous chime will sound until the engine is allowed to cool SUE SANE O This indicator will illuminate when the fog lights are on vehicle overheats If you decide to loo
208. ears Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect Phone if equipped DVD video system if equipped power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears ILLUMIN Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter To make your selec tion press and hold the RESET button until Off 90 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Display ECO If Equipped The ECO message can be turned on or off To make your selection press and release the FUNCTION SE LECT button until ON or OFF appears Display Units In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ENGLISH or MET RIC appears 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NAV Turn By Turn If Equipped When ON is selected the Turn by Turn directions will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig nated turn within a programmed route To make your selection press and release the RESET button until
209. eated air through the floor outlets or cool dehumidified air through the headliner outlets The Three Zone ATC Climate control for the Rear ATC System is on the front lower ATC panel located on the instrument panel Pressing the REAR LOCK button for the Rear ATC System from the Three Zone ATC Climate control illu minates a LOCK symbol in the rear display The rear temperature and air source are controlled from the Three Zone ATC Climate control Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC control when the REAR LOCK button is turned off NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 The Three Zone ATC Climate control is located in the headliner near the center of the vehicle 045607740 Rear Zone ATC 4 Rear MODE 5 REAR LOCK 1 AUTO 2 Blower Speed 3 Rear Temperature The Rear Zone ATC for the rear passengers is in the overhead console above the second row passenger seats 1 Press the REAR LOCK button on the front lower ATC panel This turns off the REAR LOCK icon in the rear temperature knob 2 Rotate the Rear Blower Rear Temperature and the Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs 3 ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob counterclockwise to AUTO Once the desired temperature is displayed the ATC System will automatically achieve and maintain that comfort level When the system is set up for your comfort level it is not necessary to change the settings Y
210. eception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold aga
211. ed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check Turn Signal and High Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS li Mirrors H Inside Day Night Mirror D Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped H Outside Mirrors D Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If EQUIDDEC Gee pie cod dee eae Gea Ee a ue BPOWer MITO 2373 ese RES pee DRR D Heated Mirrors If Equipped oO Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 92 92 93 94 94 95 2 199 92 WMiUconnect p
212. ed for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners and the front passenger seat belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Also have the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC system serviced as well N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or cushion needs to be serviced in any way includ ing removal or loosening tightening of seat attach ment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accesso stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add afterm
213. ed fully upward unless the pivot cap is raised first MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 2 Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate glass 3 Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade holder 072607742 1 Wiper Blade 3 Wiper Arm 2 Blade Pivot Pin 4 Wiper Blade Holder 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE See 4 Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper arm and firmly press the wiper blade until it snaps into place 5 Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal 4
214. ed that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located in the center stack of the instrument panel Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System 045607574 Single Zone Manual Climate Control 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ie Blower Control There are four blower speeds Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position 045607577 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control to regulate the tempera ture of the air inside the passenger com partment Rotating the knob counter clockwise from top center into the blue 045607540 area indicates cooler temperatures Rotating the knob clockwise into the red area indicates warmer tempera tures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric
215. eep all objects a safe distance from the window ROOF LUGGAGE RACK IF EQUIPPED The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to carry cargo weight The load must not exceed 150 Ibs 68 kg and it should be distributed uniformly over the cross rails In addition the roof rack does not increase the total load carrying capacity of the vehicle Be sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity Roof Luggage Rack 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Relocate the cross rails aligning the cross rail stan chions end pieces with one of the vertical marks on the outboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail Make sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at any position for proper function 3 Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in position As you tighten the knob make sure the clamp tooth engages completely into the side rail slot 4 Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is locked in position NOTE e To help control wind noise when installing the cross rails make sure the arrows marked on the underside of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle e To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the cross rails are not in use fasten the front cross rail in the fourth po
216. ehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving CMTC Reset Buttons CMTC Reset Button Press the left reset button located on the instrument cluster to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the reset button for approximately two seconds When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display NE Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW 14 F ee Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius AVG Average Fuel Economy English or Metric DIE a ea sons ee eee ee Distance to Empty ED oa Sa GEE HOE sane sees Elapsed Time CMTC Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instrument cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset
217. ehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will still be on In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 CAUTION NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care e The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and failure or condition warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when us ing replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affe
218. en the unlocked liftgate squeeze the handle and pull the liftgate toward you Gas props will raise and support the liftgate in the open position 81cfe12d Liftgate Release NOTE Because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 e Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison the head restraint d a ie ri ou ME Ie a aes e Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC P ee ee dedic audax dica that span the front second and third row seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a window if equipped liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped e Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants e Three point lap
219. ent System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited a 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trademarks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect
220. equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will dis
221. er iue Eee 137 Contract Service eee 481 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 426 COOUMe S E voet RARR EED CR VR DA 423 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 425 Coolant Capacity ii saad SEE RE DER He 454 Coolant Level celeres 423 427 Disposal of Used Coolant 427 Drain Flush and Refill 424 linte ese 4 4 eu hoa 92447923 1233993 ee eh 4 S29 427 Points to Remember si sea RES 054 SERE 427 492 Pessu Cap 5445 4 OE RYK EER segs RES 426 Radiator Cap RE AT bee a EE 426 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 424 454 456 Temperate Galge ss suero OR eee EROR S 181 Corrosion Protection iss Cuda erde Hed SERS 434 Cruise Control Speed Control 132 Riise Licht sier 49 8 Gee SEI ORR DEER DE 188 Cupholdels 3 2 9 doeed dodo HARD dee trie Ge 154 439 Customer Assistance e eee 479 Customer Programmable Features 209 Daytime Running Lights ae daa bone as 125 Dealer Service sa KOR HR RUSO Eo eee PR 407 Defroster Rear Window 170 Defroster Windshield 85 273 283 Delay Intermittent Wipers 0 128 Diagnostic System Onboard 405 Digital Video Disc DVD Player 253 Dimmer Switch E adlle BE sis 224546440444 125 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle Oil Engine Power Steering Disabled Vehicle Towing Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant Engine Oil Do
222. er name and will assign 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 MPEG Sampling E as Pit Rate Ges
223. er the battery opening and snap into place General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK e Doors closed 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie e Hood closed WARNING Continued e Liftgate closed e Keep Re
224. ertain that the seatback is locked securely into seatback armrest position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury Stadium Tip n Slide Easy Entry Exit Seat Seven Passenger Models This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the third row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle To Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Forward NOTE Raise the seatback armrest before moving the Latch Rel L dip Ek ase Loop seat to allow for full seat travel N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the seatback forward and in one fluid motion the seat cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its tracks Tip n Slide Seat 81d130aa Tip n Slide Control Lever 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE A hand grip is molded into the front of each WARNING quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry and exit from the third row passenger seats Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this posi tion as it is only intended for entering and exiting the third row seats Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury To Unfold and Move the Second Row Passenger Seat Rearward 1 Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and then continue sliding the seat rearward o
225. es If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles
226. esignation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades eee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S e Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for L I Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Sizing Chart TIRE SIZING TERMS Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on E
227. etected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the seat belt Airbag Warning Light The light should turn on and remain on for four to six seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting or if the light stays on flickers or turns on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air direct
228. eye p ee 436 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 436 Wheel Nut Fe ei cu erased sce de rn Eu i Ew 391 Wind Bullen 14 55 39 9039 BEER 4 44 37 147 Vr ROSSI oa om sees BERE HEM des d d 288 lante M RM 34 CON 03093 6555464448 OAR bees ORR DA 34 510 id Windows Express DOWN ss ss se 23 Windshield Defroster 22224204 HERE KERE ees 85 Windshield Washers 126 129 EC 23282 2 99 SEE NE OE AR P UR RR 420 Windshield Wiper Blades 252b ded uns 418 Windshield Wipers as ou dodo xri ck Roo e qoe e en 126 Wiper Blade Replacement use Ens 418 Wiper Delay sonst ed REOR eae oh we EE DNE 128 WIPE ROUT ses Er Ha hee m 168 Wipers Intermittent ea wor woe doc qoe siaren 128 Wrecker TOWNE ou AVE acie 93 948 be AE 398 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler Group LLC AR 10JC49 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
229. fected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger and position everyone for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Airbag Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNINCG Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see Section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat mo
230. for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 466 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service 42 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 467 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and eng
231. fort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Mode CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX and DEFROST or a blend of these modes even if the 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M A C button is not pressed This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary Recirculation Control Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in RECIRCULATION mode Only use the RECIR CULATION mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather NOTE e If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the system is in MIX DEFROST or FLOOR mode the RECIRCULATION LED indicator will flash 3 times and then turn off to indicate RECIRCULATION mode is not allowed e Continuous use of the RECIRCULATION mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended e In cold or damp weather the use of the RECIRCULA TION mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging select the o
232. forward to open the bin door The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on the notches as shown NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 The Chill Zone compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel above the glove compart ment The beverage retainer inside the cooler is designed to hold up to two 12 oz 0 35L cans when placed horizontally in the retainer The beverage retainer is removable to allow for storage of other items in the compartment when not in use as a beverage cooler Ras ER rnnr Removable Liner CHILL ZONE BEVERAGE COOLER STORAGE COMPARTMENT The Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment can keep chilled beverages cool depending on ambient temperature and climate control setting Chill Zone is intended for nonperishable beverages only 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee Press and release the button on the door to open it the large door will swing upward to allow easy access to the compartment contents Chill Zone Beverage Cooler Operation The blower speed setting on the climate control sets the rate at which the air flows into the compartment The airflow control valve inside the compartment determines how much air flows into the compartment Turning the valve rearward increases the airflow while turning the valve forward decreases the airflow Turning the valve all the way forward will turn off the airflow into the compartmen
233. front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Mode Control Mode control allows you to choose from several selections of air distribu tion You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The 045607541 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 closer the control is to a particular mode the more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Mode gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature in any conditions other than full cold or full hot between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Mode n Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount through the defrost and side window demist outlets Mix Mode Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side ef window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining com
234. ft bag only and a right side impact deploys only the right bag Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC If Equipped SABIC airbags offer side impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The curtains deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side ET 022607261 Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain Location NOTE e Should a vehicle rollover occur the pretensioners and or SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy e Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu pant protection WARNING e If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely af
235. g System RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND To reduce potential for engine and transaxle overheating MOTORHOME ETC EE a TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER City Driving VEHICLE Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On When stopped for short periods shift the transaxle into The Ground NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended Highway Driving NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four Reduce speed wheels are off the ground Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS N Hazard Warning Flasher 380 N If Your Engine Overheats 380 N Jacking And Tire Changing 381 HO jack Location 6464404446445 4 dc en onn 382 bi ie Mre LOcanOn a sins ue EE sn DES POS 383 O Preparations For Jacking is ae ie 444443 383 O Spare Tite Removal 244026444646 DEE ES 383 EL pate lite SOWA s x sos MED ES dE REA E 385 O Jacking Instructions sceso eseesega 387 MJump Starting ES SE SS ee 902 O Preparations For Jump Start O Jump Starting Procedure W Freeing A Stuck Vehicle W Towing A Disabled Vehicle E Without The Ignition Key Lu eda ees 0 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing With The Key In The Ignition And All Four Wheels On The Ground 0 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Wh A Tow Dolly aos uc on ee
236. ged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System
237. ger in the event of an accident Heated Seats If Equipped The driver and front passenger seats are heated The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and seatback The controls for each heater are located in the switch bank in the center of the instrument panel After turning ON the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illuminate for high one for low and none for off a If High level heating is selected the system automatically switches to Low level heating and turns one indicator light off after approximately 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining Press the switch once to select High level heat ing Press the switch a second time to select Low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements Off NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 indicator light off after an additional 30 minutes of WARNING Continued continuous operation If Low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indi Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This cator light off after approximately 30 minutes of continu ee may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a ous operation seat that has been overheated could cause serious within t
238. ghts on or off for parking light operation Turn the end of the lever to according to ambient light levels To turn the system on the second detent for headlight operation turn the end of the multifunction lever to the AUTO position third detent When the system is on the headlight time delay feature is also on This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position To turn the Automatic System off turn the end of the multifunction lever out of the AUTO position 031407548 Headlight Switch 031407553 Headlight Switch NOTE The engine must be running before the head lights will turn on in the automatic mode Headlights with Wipers Available with Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay If Equipped This feature is particularly useful
239. grated Power Module TIPM 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE use Fuse e When installing the power module cover it is ee esp important to ensure the cover is properly posi Green tioned and fully latched Failure to do so may eS escwudr allow water to get into the TIPM and possibly Pink If Equipped result in an electrical system failure P Eee pee When replacing a blown fuse it is important to Pink use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating 1E a l The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Natural may result in a dangerous electrical system over E pce load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it Natural indicates a problem in the circuit that must be J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys corrected Green tem ABS Pump Electronic Stability Program ESP MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 Cartridge Mini re Cartridge Mini T 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Pink tem ABS Valve Yellow IOD Main Electronic Stability J14 40 Amp Electric Back Light Program ESP Green EBL 40 Amp Power Memory Seat J15 30 Amp Rear Blower If Green If Equipped Pink Equipped 40 Amp Flex Fuel PZEV Mo JA7 40 Amp Starter Solenoid Green tor If Equipped Green J10 30 Amp If Equipped Head J18 20 Amp NGC Powertrain Pink lamp Washer Relay Blue ed Module BUX Manifold Tun Transmission Range vane J19 60 Amp Radiator Fan Motor J11 30 Amp If Equipped Sway Yellow Ti
240. handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to the heading Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with program ming for a Rolling Code 5 PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor it is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door 1 Garage Door Opener 2 Training Button 1
241. he accelerator pedal Do not press the accelerator Use the Fob with Integrated Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If Engine Fails To Start WARNING e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans axle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and ve hicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in Wh
242. he file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling keit Pit Rate pe 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 Layer 3 Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 48 64 96 128 EN A 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase
243. he positive cable is attached to the at the start of each warm season This service should positive post and the negative cable is attached to include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance the negative post Battery posts are marked posi test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this tive and negative and identified on the time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 415 WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Warranty Information Book located on the DVD for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigera
244. hen the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases To Accelerate for Passing Press the accelerator pedal as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on screen image of the rear of your vehicle whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE The image will be displayed on the Navigation Multimedia radio display screen WARNING Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Park View Rear Back Up Camera Always
245. holding the release lever forward move the shift lever from PARK to NEUTRAL 6 Release the manual override Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key fob from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is applied Four Speed or Six Speed AutoStick Automatic Transaxle The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Shift Lever NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Gear Ranges PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transaxle The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion Apply parking brake when leaving vehicle in this range When parking on a flat surface place the shift lever in the PARK position first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the
246. hone If Equipped 96 ll Voice Command If Equipped 96 bo T 96 O Manual Front Seat Adjustments 96 ORecliner Adjustment sss sse aste sis 98 O Lumbar Support If Equipped 99 O Driver s Seat Height Adjustment If sono PTT 100 o Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat If EUIS eN FO OE ET EE EE OE 100 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M B Power Seat If Equipped 102 O Adjusting Active Head Restraints 103 O Second Row Passenger Seats 106 H Third Row Passenger Seats Seven Passenger Models ss acus ope ego gh pns 106 o Heated Seats If Equipped 106 O 60 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats 108 050 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats With Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models rm 115 W To Open And Close The Hood Ti M DIU ge eee MERE HER ERA DRESS AGAS 119 O Multifunction Lever is severe MEDE yum 119 o Headlights And Parking Lights 120 o Automatic Headlights If Equipped 120 o Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only 121 o Headlight Time Delay If Equipped 121 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 122 o Daytime Running Lights If Equipped 123 Hill OR Reminder 4 1 esae vt ek m er dg 123 oO Fog Lights If Equipped 5 9 9 mede 24 123 A Turn Signals DD 124 OLane Change Assist 44 ss Re ES ED 3 125 o
247. ht Out with a single chime e Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out with a single chime e RKE Battery Low with a single chime e Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not in PARK NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Channel Transmit Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Channel Training Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Channel Trained Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Clearing Channels Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Channels Cleared Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Did Not Train Refer to Garage Door Opener in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Left Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating Left Rear Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating Right Front Low Pressure with a single chime Refer to information on Tire Pressure and Tire Pressure Monitor in Starting And Operating
248. hts 15 Amp Right Park Side Blue Marker Running Tail Lights Auto Shut Down ASD 1 and 2 25 Amp Natural Mini Fuse Cartridge ase Description Cavity M20 15 Amp Electronic Vehicle In Blue formation Center EVIC If Equipped Interior Lighting Steering Wheel Switches If Equipped Switch Bank EES Yellow ASD 3 Red EE Red Natural MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 e Er 20 Amp Fuel Pump Diesel M30 15 Amp Rear Wiper Module Yellow Lift Pump Blue Module Power Fold ing Mirror J1962 Diag Feed 10 Amp Power MIRRORS Red Switch Drivers Win Yellow M27 10 Amp Steering Column Red Lock Wireless Igni M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint fon Node i ENS 4 a PEM M33 10 Amp NGC Powertrain 10 Amp NGC Powertrain Red Control Module Bat Red Control Module tery Feed TCM Transmission Feed Batt 10 Amp Occupant Classifica Red tion Module OCM 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ue Lr M34 10 Amp Power Assist Module M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Red HVAC Module Head Natural lamp Washers Com K1 Ignition Run pass Module If Accessory Relay BP ee RAD L ignition Run Rela Fan Diesel K3 Starter Solenoid Relay M35 10 Amp Heated Mirrors If ET Ignition Run Start Red Equipped Rela M36 20 Amp Power Outlet 3 KS NGC Powertrain Yellow Batt Control Module M37 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake Sys Rela PCM Red tem ABS E
249. i abe a ES E 46 5 seek AE ee 204 DPGCHICdHONG PPP DES 456 Ta Sopa oos x4 9 1S oboe AAR dod and 454 Fuel System Caution x uc edes on ec dex oom deg BE 357 PUTOO sosaren perne a Erre 357 Jc P 439 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 138 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 3x 2x Rs 357 405 Gas Gauge Fuel Gauge 0 00 181 Gasoline Clean Air eee 353 Gasoline Fuel 64456444404 aciei RO Y GR ERAS 352 CONSEN osos acevem dp Ea e EIE SURE UP 204 Gasoline Reformulated 353 354 496 INDEX NEE Id Gauges Coolant Temperature 2 usen bos RE DR ded 181 H 22 5999 29339425 N OO FORT are 181 eus MMC 184 DOCCUOMCICD iss d ed AR aed a dcus 183 TOCHOINCIOR so AAR AA RUN VOR RR RUE ROMS e 184 Sear Ranges van eed sacs xau ege SEES TE 301 Gearshift 444446 nk R3 RR m RR debes 301 General Information 17 25 305 352 General Maintenance llle 408 lass Clea C M 438 Gross Axle Weight Rating 359 362 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 399 361 CVV uoa 644 ED EE NE OR 359 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 96 253 254 Hard Drive HDD a uses doo esent eee eS 253 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow orandide Valet 060 p ease Gorn a ACERO RR 307 Hazard Warning Flasher ss ew repe iniaatas 380 Head Kestainis o uos ED aat ie d eg SiS a 103 lei Gelde OR EE EE od doa ERGE 119 120 AON 44444525 VREK e SEA EIE ae oe 120 Bulb Replacement
250. ill be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RS 5 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifica tions were met NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 POWER SUNROOF IF E
251. in to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no tim
252. ine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer O C C O O G G C C L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter if equipped Change Rear Drive Assembly RDA fluid Change Power Transfer Case PTU fluid Change the automatic transaxle fluid and external filter Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 468 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service 66 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspe
253. infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchor system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchor System Lower An chors and Tether for CHildren e Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and
254. ing the right front tire block the left rear wheel is did rig P gm W j N l i LITTLE liil d hi tiu Cee TR Ba NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked Spare Tire Removal NOTE On Seven Passenger Models fold the third row passenger seats flat This will provide more space when accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch mechanism 384 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from them IM AT EER Te Te Lowering Raising Spare Tire NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assembly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch 3 Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and raise
255. ing and heat build up L Low Four Speed Transaxle This range should be used for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts occur earlier than other gear range selections CAUTION If the transaxle operating temperature exceeds ac ceptable limits the vehicle computer will override D Overdrive and 5 range for six speed AutoStick transaxle and 3 range for four speed auto transaxle by changing shift points This is done to prevent transaxle damage due to overheating Reset Mode Electronic Transaxle The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle automatically shifts into second gear third gear for six speed The transaxle remains in second gear third gear for six speed despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx Id continue to operate This Reset feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event of a momentary problem the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position Restart the engine O1 eA Q N e Shift into the desired gear range and resume drivi
256. ing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid Fluid Level Check 2 4L Engine Use the following procedure to check the automatic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position ending with the lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then CAUTION remove dipstick and note the reading e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transaxle shift quality and or torque converter sh
257. ing water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 310 STARTING AND OPERATING See POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering of the steering wheel travel will increase th
258. ion afforded by prevailing road conditions ABS pery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others 316 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system commonly referred to as ESP This system includes Anti Lock Brake System ABS Brake Assist System BAS Traction Control System TCS Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM and Electronic Stability Program ESP These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions Anti Lock Brake System ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent wheel lock up When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing con
259. is especially true on large flat loads and may result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features Mi Instrument Cluster SS H Instrument Cluster Descriptions ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC I Eeuipped sr se ES ou SR THE De PR Ir eS ACM Reset DUNONS is oo Rus tei v ee aed CO Compass Temperature Display ll Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC K Eotippedis se sae Res DE N de Ee N RD D Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays EO Change Required 3 ss sesse ese sassa ETH PUNCUONS 226 2448s 2604 SURE RR Hed O Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode IF Bauipped sos 0854 eed hs Oe ds eho O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack aces 2 aa ad NEED dd 212 O Operating Instructions Radio Mode 212 D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 221 H Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files 223 O List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play 225 O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA BL TEE OE EE ET ae 225 lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV f Equipped s as is skies hte ds 228 O Operating Instructions
260. is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warn ing Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light illuminates you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Driving the v
261. ision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back actly when installing an infant or child restraint NOTE For additional information refer to A rearward facing child restraint should only be www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy site for additional information http www tc gc ca ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm fatal injury to the infant 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it
262. it upright so the tire s tread is on the ground 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and remove it from the center of the wheel WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 385 1 Remove the jack handle components 1 2 and 3 from storage and assemble them Spare Tire Retainer Spare Tire Stowage NOTE On seven passenger models fold the third row Lowering Raising Spare Tire passenger seats flat This will provide more space when NOTE Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at mechanism the end of component 3 This will lock these components together Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel 386 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when 4 Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop seated on component 2 This will make it easier to rotate the assembly when operating the winch mechanism 2 Fit the assembled jack handle over the winch drive nut located in the jack storage area Rotate the jack handle assembly counterclockwise until there is enough cable slack to allow you to pull the cable and retainer out from underneath the vehicle CAUTION The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and it can damage the winch 3 Place the spare tire near to the winch ca
263. itch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manually Press and hold the switch in the forward position Release the switch when the sunroof is in the position desired and it will stop moving If you continue to hold the switch in the forward position the sunroof will close fully and then stop automatically Release the switch once the sunroof stops moving Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release and the sunroof will close automatically from any position The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs then press the switch forward and release to Express Close N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Pinch Protect Override If a known obstruction ice debris etc prevents closing press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after the reversal occurs This allows the sunroof to move towards the closed position NOTE Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is pressed Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the V button in the center of the switch and the sunroof will open to
264. ition Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole opening Push the safety latch lever to the right and then on the underside of the hood raise the hood 81d014ae 031307222 Hood Prop Rod Underhood Safety Latch N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 CAUTION LIGHTS Multifunction Lever die re vere possible damage The multifunction lever controls the operation of the Before closing hood make sure the hood Fep rod headlights parking lights turn signal lights instrument is fully seated into its storage retaining clips panel lights instrument panel light dimming interior e Do not slam the hood to close it Use a firm lights and fog lights if equipped The multifunction downward push at the center front edge of the Jever is located on the left side of the steering column hood to ensure that both latches engage Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious 031407547 Multifunction Lever injury or death 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Headlights and Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent This system automatically turns the headli
265. ive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is shown in the following diagram ER C E ce 055707139 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven This
266. iver Door Ist Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn With Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Flash Lamp With Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds after turning the ignition to the LOCK position To make your selection press and release the RESET button until d 30 60 or OO appears Headlamps With Wipers Available with Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned N UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 ON The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this feature To make your selection press and release the RESET button until ON or OFF app
267. jected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported
268. k in EE ss J20 30 Amp Front Windshield an owe Pink Wiper Hi Low Sliding Door 20 Amp NE Front Rear Washer Blue 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Zh E a Natural Equipped Yellow tery or Accessory Front Rear Axle Yellow Equipped Yellow AWD Mod J 4 10 Amp Trailer Tow If Red Equipped 25 Amp Power Inverter If Natural Equipped 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Yellow Accessory ACC Rain Sensor MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 Cartridge Mini Cartridge Mini T M10 15 Amp Vanity Lamps M12 30 Amp Radio Amplifier Blue Hands Free Module Green AMP HFM It Equipped M13 20 Amp Cabin Compartment Remote Display If Yellow Node CCN Multi Equipped Satellite function Switch Siren Digital Audio Re Module ITM ee 20 Amp _ Trailer Tow BUX If Equipped Universal Slow Panne Garage Door Opener UGDO If 20 Amp Auto Dim Rearview Equipped Vanity Yellow Mirror If Equipped Light Video Enter Infrared Sensor IR tainment System If Equipped Multi VES If Equipped function Switch Tire M11 10 Amp Automatic Tempera BUE IR Sys Red ture Control ATC Equipped Transf If Equipped Under gs od ice MEE oodi e Case Module If DU Equipped 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cartridge Mini e 10 Amp _ Occupant Restraint Controller ORC Occupant Classifica tion Module OCM 15 Amp Left Park Side Blue Marker Running Tail Lights License Lig
269. k under the hood yourself refer to Maintaining Your Vehicle and follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads H safely pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle 6 Low Fuel Warning Light This indicator lights when the fuel level drops to with the A C turned off until the pointer drops back approximately one eighth tank into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the en gine OFF immediately and call for service 7 Turn Signal Indicator Light amp The left or right arrow will flash in unison with the corresponding front and rear turn signal lights when the turn signal switch is operated NOTE e Achime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate 8 High Beam Indicator ED This light shows that the high beam headlights are on Pull the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column toward you to switch to low beam 9 Speedometer Shows the vehicle speed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 10 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the vehicle Security system is arming and then flash slowly when the system is armed The
270. l dehumidified air flows through the air outlets If ECONOMY mode is desired press the SNOWFLAKE button to turn off the SNOWFLAKE mode in the ATC display and deactivate the A C system NOTE e If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode the SNOW FLAKE can be turned off but the A C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows e If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass select DEFROST mode and increase blower speed 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Recirculation Control When outside air contains smoke odors or GS high humidity or if rapid cooling is desired you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION mode control button RECIRCULATION mode should only be used temporarily The recirculation symbol will illuminate in the display when this button is selected Push the button a second time to turn off the RECIRCULATION mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle NOTE In cold weather use of the RECIRCULATION mode may lead to excessive window fogging The RE CIRCULATION mode is not allowed in the FLOOR MIX and DEFROST modes to improve window clearing op eration Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected Rear Automatic Temperature Control ATC If Equipped The Rear ATC System has floor air outlets at the rear of the right side sliding door and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating position The system provides h
271. lean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Selection of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant antif
272. leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions ESP cor rects for over steering and under steering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path the ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over steer or under steer e Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position ESP TCS Indicator Light The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during accele
273. lectronic EE EN Electric Back Light Stability Program EBL Rela ESP Stop Light Ki Er Switch Rear Blower Rela ASD Relay Feed for M19 and M21 Radiator Fan Relay Low Speed If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery You may VEHICLE STORAGE e Remove the IOD Ignition Off Draw mini fuses from the Totally Integrated Power Module located in the engine compartment e Or disconnect the battery negative cable MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 REPLACEMENT BULBS All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb Number Courtesy Reading Lamps Incandescent 578 Courtesy Reading Lamps Cpuonal LED ses kas AE one eee me PR LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer Glove Box Lamp a c ce acrem d RC deae d 194 Carno La acoso parc mee do orate ae dece den iode di na 579 Optional Door Map Pocket Cupholder LED Serviced at Authorized Dealer NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low Beam Headlainp iu vro o9 ete TR eras High Beam Headlamp Front Patk Turn Signal x 2232s 409r eed wy 3757AK Side Marker Lamps ue vada eR Rr dpa wa 168 Front Eos LAMPo sce m adm dede desc do ia PSX24W Center High Mounted
274. led as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that are provided with the child restraint system NOTE When installing a child restraint if it interferes with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference e seatback and are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces The lower anchors are round bars located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the In addition there are tether strap anchors located behind each rear seatback near to the floor ot Myr ere Strap Kaon Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a means of adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap a mdi 022607265 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a NOTE means of adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchors Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the seatcover material Then a
275. ll display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL 042305233 RES RSC Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tur
276. lling an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode To install a child restraint first pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasion ally and pull it tight if necessary NOTE When installing a child restraint if it interferes with the Head Restraint recline the seatback slightly to remove the interference NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 To attach a child restraint tether strap e If necessary move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchor atu A
277. llision 1 Open th door Remember that the rear doors can only be opened eee ia l from the outside when the child protection locks are 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the engaged Failure to follow this warning may resultin child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position serious injury or death Eum uU ee tet NOTE e After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys tem always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position e For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up to the UNLOCK position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle Child Lock Control 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE After disengaging the Child Protection Door Lock system always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position WINDOWS Power Windows The window controls on the driver s door trim panel control all of the door windows Power Window Switches There are single window controls on each passenger door trim panel which operate the passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 NOTE WARNING e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window
278. losed burn with bottle holders The bottle holders are located on the ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors In addition to cupholders vehicles may also be equipped to avoid injury door trim panels 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M STORAGE Console Storage Open storage areas or cubby bins are located in the floor Instrument Panel Storage Compartment If Equipped Press and release the button on the door to open it The door swings upward to allow easy access to the compart ment Floor Console Cubby Bin Instrument Panel Storage Compartment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 aa d 035207220 Center Console Cubby Bin Center Console Storage Bin There is additional storage under the center console NOTE The sliding armrest if equipped must be in the armrest Pull upward on the release lever located on the rearward position to access the release button on the front of the lid front of the bin door 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Flip n Stow Front Passenger Seat Storage If NOTE Make sure that objects inside the bin do not Equipped interfere with the latch before closing the seat Push the The seat latch release loop is located in the center of the seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback latches to the base Pull the loop upward to release the latch and
279. low the vehicle to cool Thereafter obtain service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifications im mediately N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or steam from your radiator If you see or hear To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage e Do not shut OFF the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle e Do not idle the engine with any ignition coil connec tors disconnected for prolonged periods Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty c
280. ls Power Inverter Switch Press and release the switch once to turn on the power outlet A status indicator in the switch will illuminate in approximately one second to indicate that power is available at the outlet Press and release the switch again to turn off the power outlet The status indicator will also turn off NOTE Due to built in overload protection the power outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power rating is exceeded WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Do not use a three prong adaptor Do not insert any objects into the receptacles Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CUPHOLDERS For passengers in the second row there are two cuphold There are two cupholders located in the center floor ers located in the center armrest between the two seats console for the front passengers 986 TOR Armrest Cupholders Center Console Cupholders NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 For vehicles equipped with third row seating there are additional cupholders located in the trim panels 035107219 La Door Bottle Holder WARNING Quarter Trim Panel Cupholders Seven Passenger Models If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle ANNE holder they can spill when the door is c
281. lure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the 055007576 speed 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced 340 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer
282. m tire lift provides maximum stability covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 390 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M NOTE For vehicles so equipped the wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling the original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel and then install the wheel nuts 6 Install the spare tire NOTE e For vehicles so equipped do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare e Refer to Compact Spare Tire and to Limited Use Spare under Tires General Information in Start ing and Operating for additional warnings cautions and information about the spare tire its use and operation 7 Install the wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the wheel nuts WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury or death 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter clockwise with the jack handle 9 Finish tightening the wheel nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate wheel nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft Ibs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a
283. ments Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 5 stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You might not have Th
284. mirror NOTE The passenger side convex outside mirror will give a much wider view to the rear and especially of the lane next to your vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors Folding Feature If Equipped Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged The hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to resist damage The hinge has three detent positions forward rearward and normal Power Mirrors The power mirror switch is located on the driver s door trim panel Power Mirror Switches 1 Mirror Direction Control 2 Right Mirror Select 3 Left Mirror Select NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Models without Express Window Feature Press the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing Models with Express Window Feature Press and release the mirror select button marked L left or R right and then pres
285. mote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters HAZARD switch off away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls e BRAKE switch inactive brake pedal not pressed could cause serious injury or death e Ignition key removed from ignition switch To Enter Remote Start Mode e Battery at an acceptable charge level and Press and release the REMOTE START button e RKE PANIC button not pressed x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock parking WARNING lights will flash and horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon cycle oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode Continued N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 e For security power window and power sunroof op eration if equipped are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle To Exit Remote S
286. mounted in three of the four wheel wells Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings X The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will ref illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing STARTING AND OPERATING 349 81826bed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash ing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale light will 350 STARTING AND OPERATING M turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to EN 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the EO g GI TPMS to receive this information SS eee ee Check TPMS Warning a i E When a system fault is detected the Tire Pressure Moni aun tala al eem toring Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds i ar EE aan Was and then remain on solid The system
287. must press and hold the brake pedal down while shifting out of PARK CAUTION WARNING Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key fob from the ignition switch and apply the parking brake Once the key fob is removed from the ignition switch the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against
288. n is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was turned off previously e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer TSC activates automatically once the excessively swaying trailer is recognized When TSC is functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power will be reduced and you will feel the brake being applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying 324 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE The TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION the Partial Off mode WARNING Tire Markings e TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Ve hicle Loading and Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information If TSC activates while towing a trailer stop the vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the iy 3 trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway d sce a i dy ows Failure to follow these warnings can result in an Lade e e o 054903773 accident or serious personal injury 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN 2 Size D
289. n its tracks until it locks in place 2 Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place Crab Handle 3 Adjust the seat track position as desired Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 WARNING Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked securely into position Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury 50 50 Split Third Row Passenger Seats with Fold Flat Feature Seven Passenger Models To provide additional storage area each third row pas senger seat can be folded flat This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating room if needed NOTE Prior to folding the third row passenger seat make sure the second row passenger seat is not in a reclined position This will allow the seat to fold easily To Fold the Seat Pull the latch release loop located at the top of the seatback upward push the seat forward slightly and release the release loop Then continue to push the seat forward The head restraints will fold automatically as the seat moves forward Seatback Release 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Unfold the Seat The seatback can also be locked in a reclined position To Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull
290. n maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e nsects tree sap and tar e Salt in the air near seacoast localities e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and cargo area be kept
291. n pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location DEERE i If uy ae EN HE Uu TEE SPS Be EET if Fart 2 8 PEE PERDE EEE t Ege SES PARES ey oh or TE IW HERE EU E ERA S Ew Fk NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONI 2 REAR 3 1 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehi
292. nd the blades cannot return to the park position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval 031507503 Front Wiper Control There are five delay settings which allow you to regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of two cycles every second to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between cycles at vehicles speeds below 10 mph 16 km h or from a minimum of one cycle every second NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles at vehicle speeds greater than 10 mph 16 km h NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h delay times will be doubled Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the OFF position
293. ne If the NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain HS the rear rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper window defroster only when the engine is operating freezes to the window damage to the rear wiper CAUTION motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the rear wiper blade from returning to the park position If the rear wiper control is turned off and the blade cannot return to the park position dam age to the rear wiper motor may occur Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate Continued NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 CAUTION Continued To Move the Cross Rails Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra 1 Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxi mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window side rail K
294. ng NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transaxle cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transaxle that offers six manual ratio changes to provide you with more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation By placing the shift lever one shift level below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to select a higher or lower range of gears Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 and to the right an upshift The gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the transaxle range indicator NOTE In AutoStick mode the transaxle will only shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left AutoStick is deactivated when the shift lever is moved out of the AutoStick position General Information You can launch the vehicle from
295. ng difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its Customer Center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for an vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s Service Contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s Service Contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s Service Contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s Service Contract If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer
296. nge marking 410 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet EUR the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first CAUTION Engine Oil Selection Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the For best performance and maximum protection under all chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is types of operating conditions the manufacturer only not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty NE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 411 Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows th
297. ngine oil and engine oil filter L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter _J If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 475 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer 150 Months Maintenance Service to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions Schedule warranty Change the engine oil and engine oil filter WARNING _J Rotate tires L1 Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic Failure t
298. ngs information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the tou
299. nk Key Fobs to the vehicle electronics A blank Key Fob is one that has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system serviced bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the authorized dealer N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Customer Key Programming Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be performed at an authorized dealer General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm VSA system monitors the vehicle doors and liftgate for unauthorized entry If something triggers the alarm the system will sound the horn intermittently flash the headlights park lamps and or turn signals and flash the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster Rearming of the System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the system will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the system will rearm itself To Arm the System 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and exit the vehicle 2 Lock the doors and liftgate by pressing the power door LOC
300. noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Base And Mid Line Clusters Only Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following pro cedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this proce
301. nsion tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 469 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 78 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 470 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Servi
302. nt or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C system sealers stop leak products seal conditioners compressor oil and refrigerants A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result 416 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M The A C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following steps to replace the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument panel Glove Box Removal 3 Pivot the glove box downward 4 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 417 A C Air Filter Replacement 5 Remove the A C air filter by pulling it
303. ntinuous chimes turn the en gine OFF immediately and call for service N WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 381 WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING e Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Continued 382 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jack Location VARNING Continued The jack and jack handle are stowed underneath a cover e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous in the rear storage bin in the cargo area The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You
304. nued Continued 388 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts on the vA WARNING Continued wheel with the flat tire Turn the wheel nuts counter e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground 3 Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to the flat tire Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange e Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher P lt lt Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and jack handle from stowage 060508793 Front Jacking Location WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 389 WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 5 Remove the wheel nuts For vehicles so equipped remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand Do not pry the wheel cover off Then pull the wheel off the hub 060508794 WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel Rear Jacking Location 4 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise with the jack handle Raise the vehicle until the tire just clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimu
305. ny vehicle All three second row passenger seating positions have lower anchors that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats You should NEVER in stall LATCH compatible child seats so that two seats UN share a common lower anchorage If installing child seats a in adjacent seating positions or if your child restraints are not LATCH compatible install the restraints using DNE 1 Outer 60 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops A and B If placing a sec the vehicle s seat belts ond child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 40 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Middle 6076 Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops B and C 2 Middle 60 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops B and C If placing a sec ond child seat in the vehicle use the Outer 4076 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E DO NOT USE Outer 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B 3 Outer 40 Seating Position Use Lower Anchor Loops D and E If placing a sec ond child seat in the vehicle use Outer 6096 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops A and B or Middle 60 Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C Latch Anchorages 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to follow the manufacturer s directions carefully when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be instal
306. o a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the Partial Off mode Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section for more information Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ee driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve
307. o properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ihi PDT hes POL KAS See ORR ees 479 O Prepare For The Appointment 479 D Prepare JA Lied eae cade tagaad EC a Hber d eat 479 O Be Reasonable With Requests 479 N if You Need Assistance 479 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 480 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 480 E In Mexico Contact su s uus 2 eau Xa KE As D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 481 n eties Con El o perie onc E n aad n as oe 481 ll Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 482 EM MOPAR Parts aeos E haee xad ee go did 482 N Reporting Safety Defects 482 O In The 50 United States And Washington Cre EE OE EE OES eee ee 482 O In Canada 478 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee W Publication Order Forms 483 E riete Grades 2468694649 PS PS ENS 485 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O lemperature Grades tine aon ea 0 3 nd aee sa 486 Quality Giles PT 485 Tread Weal dacacaa cam wseuwckgoaefe adis 485
308. o select and start playing the track By turning the Tune Scroll knob fast you can jump through the list faster During fast scroll you may notice a slight delay in updating the informa tion on the radio display During all List modes the iPod will display all lists in wrap around mode So if the track you wish to select is at the bottom of the list you just turn the Tune Scroll knob backward counterclockwise to get to the track faster Radio Preset Buttons In the List mode the radio preset buttons are used as shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod device e 1 Playlists e 2 Artists e 3 Albums e 4 Genres 5 Audiobooks e 6 Podcasts After pressing a preset button you will see the list you are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit the List mode without selecting a track press the same preset button again to go back to Play mode LIST Button Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu of the iPod This takes you to the same top level menu as on your iPod Turn the Tune Scroll knob to list the top menu item you wish to select and then press the Tune Scroll knob This will take you to the next sub menu list item of the iPod and you can follow the same steps to go to the desired track in that list Not all iPod sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE Button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
309. ob and has power available when the ignition switch is in the element must be used ON or ACC position N e Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced e The power outlet on the bottom of the center console shares the fuse with the power outlet on the back of the console The combined usage must not exceed 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts Rear Power Outlet N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with access
310. of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 361 TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possi
311. oms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World Wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality 354 STARTING AND OPERATING ee The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the Winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and driveability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from
312. on the HomeLink Buttons Internet at www HomeLink com for safety infor NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu mation or assistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming HomeLink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 1 3 in 3 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and
313. ongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it pro vides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights TW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements 364 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight distributing systems may not be compat ible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec reational vehicle dealer for additional information 057007215 Without Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 057007214 057007212 With Weight Distributing Hitch Correct Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing Hitch Incorrect 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2 000 lbs 907 kg with the o
314. or Locks Door Locks Automatic Door Opener Garage Driving On Slippery Surfaces Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water DVD Player Video Entertainment System Electric Remote Mirrors INDEX ee 409 N INDEX 493 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 148 Electrical Power Outlets 254 t0604 MORA t 148 Electronic Brake Control System 316 Anti Lock Brake System cse ens 315 Brake ASSISESUS ONE aded bone RR det area 318 Electronic Roll Mitigation 919 Electronic Stability Programi aos ac acie e PE rer 320 Traction Control Systemi is ies acp kh t RES 319 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 319 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 132 Electronic Stability Program ESP 193 320 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 187 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIG RR EIE RT ETA OOK 135 200 Emergency In Case of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck 396 Hazard Warning Flasher 380 Jacke ete e EA et ene EE ET IG 381 JUMP DEGIE 2 264 sk RR ied PST ERE ORE 392 VOEO cane RES hoa Ce ee ew DEE PES 380 JOWING aepo 9e SIR Su SU ua d ee RUE ER dod 398 Emission Control System Maintenance 406 460 Ini sussa KERKE DEE ORR GE 82 403 404 Air Cleaner lt 2 ees sess PORN OE RT EA 412 Block Heater 4122339329 9 4935 9 4922x53 297 Break In Recommendations 82 Checking Oil Level iis amen RR RR ES ogres 40
315. ories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug POWER INVERTER IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC 150 Watt maximum power outlet located on the back of the center console This outlet can power cellular phones electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts Certain high end video games such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit as Power Inverter will most power tools The power inverter is designed with built in overload protection If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded the power inverter will automatically shut down Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset If the power rating exceeds approximately 170 Watts the power inverter NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 may have to be reset manually To reset the inverter manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON To avoid overloading the circuit check the power ratings on electrical devices prior to using the inverter The control switch for the outlet is located in the switch bank above the climate contro
316. ort trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area Lap Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with riding in these areas are more likely to be seri combination lap shoulder belts pusiy tee ot kiled DEM Do not allow people to ride in any area of your The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat very sudden stops or impacts This feature allows the belts shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and normal conditions However in a collision the belt will using a seat belt properly lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body
317. ou could be injured Adjust any seat only while the vehicle is parked Recliner Adjustment The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat To recline the seat lean back lift the lever position the seatback as desired and then release the lever To return the seatback to its normal upright position lean back lift the lever lean forward and then release the lever once the seatback is in the upright position Manual Seat Adjustment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be adjusted properly and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Seatback Release 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Seatback Armrest Second Row Passenger Seat Raise the seatback armrest and lock it in place when not The latch release loop is located at the top of the in use or when additional seating area is required seatback armrest Pull the release loop upward to re WARNING lease the latch and then downward to lower the Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be c
318. ou will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles The system automatically adjusts the temperature mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible The temperature can be displayed in English or Metric units by selecting the Display Units of Measure in customer programmable feature Refer to the Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in this Section Rear Blower Control The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off or any fixed blower speed by rotating the knob from low to high This allows the rear seat occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle CAUTION Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature Control System through an intake grille located in the passenger side trim panel behind the third row seats The heater outlets are located in the passenger side trim panel just behind the sliding door Do not block or place objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater outlets The electrical system could overload causing damage to the blower motor Rear Temperature Control To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to lower the temperature and clockwise to increas
319. ou will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that it is locked in position N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 In the rear seat move toward the center of the seat to position the belt away from your neck Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How
320. p e Only the drivers door is equipped with a lock cylinder 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE i Tip Start Feature e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power Do not press the accelerator Use the Key Fob to briefly window switches radio power sunroof if equipped turn the ignition switch to the START position and and ignition powered power outlets will remain active release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned will continue to run and it will disengage automatically to the LOCK position Opening either front door will when the engine is running cancel this feature The time for this feature is pro grammable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Removing Key Fob From Ignition Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the key to the LOCK position and then remove the Key Fob NOTE e For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio power sunroof if equipped and ignition powered power outlets will remain active for approximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dange
321. pace Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Ve hicle for further information Cargo tie downs A retractable cargo area cover if equipped seats 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information 50 50 split third row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo space Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature which extends cargo space even further Refer to Seats in Understanding the Features of Your Ve hicle for further information Cargo tie downs NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Cargo Tie D owns oe E NES pea es m Z XE i WARNING Cargo tie downs are not safe anchors for a child seat tether strap In a sudden stop or collision a tie down could pull loose and allow the child seat to come loose A child could be badly injured Use only the anchors provided for child seat tethers Cargo tie downs are located on both rear trim panels These tie downs should be used to sec
322. parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transaxle in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GTW 3 GAWR 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti lized This reguirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Oper ating for proper tire inflation procedures Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres sures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting and Operating for information 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee on replacement tires and for the proper tire replace ment procedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Require
323. ped D Two And Three Zone Automatic Temperature Control ATC Systems If Equipped D Operating Tips es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 81d40f4b 1 Side Window Demist Outlet 5 Hazard Switch 9 Climate Control 2 Air Outlet 6 Switch Bank 10 Radio 3 Instrument Cluster 7 Beverage Cooler Storage Compartment 11 Ignition Switch 4 oe Compartment or Remote Display 8 Glove Box If Equipped Panel 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER NE 18F LOU URSH 8114d278 NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Coolant Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge indicates engine coolant tem perature Any reading within the normal range indicates that the cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a high temperature when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H mark safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the Air Conditioning A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transaxle into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle If the needle remains on the H mark turn the engine OFF immediately and call for service NOTE The gauge pointer will remain near its last reading when the engine is turned off It will return to a true r
324. play Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type Adult Hits Adlt Hit NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 16 Digit Character Display Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM pied If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SE
325. ptional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle NNS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 367 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain GCWR Gross Com Max GTW Gross Engine Transaxle bined Wt Rating Trailer Wt Max Tongue Wt 1 000 lbs 454 kg 2 4L Automatic 6 000 lbs 2 722 kg 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m which includes i 100 Ibs 45 kg 5 persons amp Luggage 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m which includes 1 to 2 200 Ibs 91 kg persons amp Luggage 3 5L Automatic with 1 500 lbs 680 kg out Trailer Tow Prep 7 300 Ibs 3 311 kg 32 sq ft 3 0 sq m
326. r additional driving skills required Under normal driving conditions the front wheels provide most of the traction If the front wheels begin to lose traction power is shifted automatically to the rear wheels The greater the front wheel traction loss the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels Additionally on dry pavement under heavy throttle input where one may have no wheel spin torque will be sent to the rear in a pre emptive effort to improve vehicle launch and performance characteristics CAUTION All wheels must have the same size and type tires Unequal tire sizes must not be used Unequal tire size may cause failure of the power transfer unit DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 307 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surfac
327. r authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself 408 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed systems may void your warranty and could result in civil maintenance schedule there are other components which penalties being assessed against you may require servicing or replacement in the future WARNING CAUTION You can be badly injured working on or around a e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per motor vehicle Only do service work for which you form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Continued The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 409 CAUTION Continued
328. r inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi
329. r the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information Sunroof Fully Closed Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the sunroof is fully closed ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two fused 12 Volt 13 Amp power outlets located in the center console below the radio The power outlet on the top has power available when the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position The power outlet on the bottom has power available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC position This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position Front Power Outlets 1 Switched Power 2 Battery Power UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back of the center console This power outlet has power available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK ON or ACC position 034607605 Rear Power Outlet 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left NOTE quarter trim panel in the cargo area This power outlet e To ensure proper operation a MOPAR kn
330. raction Control mi RE EE vd 464s 192 321 323 Instrument Cluster less 119 181 TOM Signal siese RR xmas 85 119 124 183 448 450 OE ae OR RD EE tee AR ee RETE 125 Vanity VECEOE by eet o SE EE oe eee ee a ee ee Y 20 bur Ae 453 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 181 Lights On Reminder sv EES SERE dro 125 Load Foon Calg s ax agencies OC BAD EE 164 Lo Fuel 22423332655 PES RE RE ES jol die2 Loading Veludie 224239903 PS ES Di RE 359 360 LOW due isi RYE TEE ARE ER T EVE 189 CAO st wa 2 RUPEE NE SENE PEE 360 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 192 n cc C 330 500 LOCKS 229322 bee ee eee eee eee MES 28 Auto Unlock 2224440448400 foes ee ee HR SS 30 Child PrOlteCHON soe ous hwo er SERE Xue 92 Bet Lv ee ne eae hee ewes ERES SU RUP 28 Power Door 29293 9899 AE Ee d ace ENTE E ERA 29 Low lire Pressure System ax 454565 orare ss e Ys 343 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LAICH RR EO OT AE EE ET EA 76 78 LUDHUSOUDIL DOUY x vs weg adu BERE HEESE Et 417 Luggage Rack Roof Rack sux 171 Lumbar ou DD OBL secre ad ee soe to opea SEE 29 Maintenance Free Dattery a made eu decease es 413 Maintenance General seen 408 Maintenance Procedures sess 408 Maintenance Schedule 460 Maintenance Sunroof 000008 147 Malfunction Indicator Light Check En oie sis SEEP 9 dos KAR cee Ped gr d 192 406 INDEX M Manual Service 123223939 ESE R RE 6
331. radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and CAUTION multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert ejected before a new disc can be loaded a second CD if one is already loaded l V l Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio other side is a CD should not be used and they ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and EJECT Button Ejecting a CD seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 Press the EJECT button to eject the CD can cause damage to the player NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 If you have ejected
332. ration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions STARTING AND OPERATING 321 WARNING ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ESP Operating Modes The ESP system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESP Whenever the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most driving situations ESP 322 STARTING AND OPERATING ee should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted Refer to Partial Off for additional informa tion Partial Off The ESP OFF button is located in the switch bank above the climate Control To enter the Partial Off mode momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate To turn the ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF button and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will turn off This
333. rded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type dispos able oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 413 used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters a
334. re a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment that is located behind the left front fender and is accessible through the wheel well The wheel and tire assemble do not need to be removed to access the compartment Remote battery terminals are located in the engine com partment for jump starting To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the access panel from the inner fender shield WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amounts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling 414 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe CAUTION Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance your air conditioner e It is essential when replacing the cables on the should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer battery that t
335. re warning limit a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will turn on upon the next ignition switch cycle 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition switch cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 348 STARTING AND OPERATING M 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale light will turn off as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Three Trigger modules
336. reeze and may plug the radiator Continued N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 CAUTION Continued When adding engine coolant antifreeze e This vehicle has not been designed for use with The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR propylene glycol based engine coolant anti Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or coolant antifreeze is not recommended equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant Adding Coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance 37 C are anticipated intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up u to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte ized water when mixing the water engine coolant nance period it is important that you use the same antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the vehicle Please review these recommendations for using engine cooling system Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze 426 MAINTAINING YOUR V
337. region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton A withthe corresponding number 1 6 where the A CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be e
338. revent carbon monoxide poisoning the vehicle Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle Continued NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 357 ADDING FUEL NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler door rein forcement Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the left side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use with this vehicle e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank fille
339. ring wheel mounted buttons are also equipped with the EVIC The EVIC Trip computer functions consists of the following NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 e System status including vehicle information warning message displays and Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS displays if equipped e Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features The system allows the driver to select information by pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering wheel E MENU MENU Button EVIC Steering Wheel Switches Press and release this button and the mode displayed will change between Compass Outside Temperature Trip Functions System Status and Personal Settings 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press this button to reset Trip Functions and change Personal Settings RESET Button Press this button to scroll through Trip Func VW tions Average Fuel Economy Distance To Empty DTE Elapsed Time Units In System SCROLL Status Messages and Personal Settings Button Customer Programmable Features COMPASS TEMPERATURE Button Press this button to display the Compass Outside Temperature Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on e Left Front Turn Signal Lig
340. rmats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Sampling keit Pit Rate bs 320 256 224 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags D3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
341. rmine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level 2 4L Engine the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is ad equate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the coolant in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle 3 5L Engine the level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant anti freeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to main tain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This
342. ront seat passenger a wide field of view to conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passen ger seats To use the interior observation mirror press on the raised bars on the compartment door and release the door will swing downward then raise the door until it is almost closed and release The door will latch in position to use the interior observation mirror Power Sunroof Switch If Equipped Refer to Power Sunroof in Understanding the Fea tures of Your Vehicle for further information GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the Universal Transceiver Do not train the transceiver if people pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or
343. rous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the Key Fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is LOCK or ACC a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC position SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses Key Fob with factory mated Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and Wireless Ignition Node WIN to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine After turning the ignition switch to the ON position the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check
344. rt a small flat blade tool between the end of the lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the housing 3 Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb s electrical connector turn counterclockwise with the other hand and then separate the bulb and connector assembly from the lens 4 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 5 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place 6 Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite end of the lens into the housing making sure it locks in the housing 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate Front Wheel Drive FWD Models with 2 4L PZEV Engine 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Front Wheel Drive FWD Models without 2 4L PZEV and 3 5L En 20 5 Gallons 77 6 Liters gine All Wheel Drive Models 21 Gallons 79 8 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 26 Liters 3 5L Engine SAE 10W 30 API Certified NN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 U S Metric Cooling System 2 4L Engine and Single or Dual Zone Climate Control System MO 7 9 Quarts 7 5 Liters PAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 2 4L Engine and Three Zone Climate Control System MOPAR 9 8 Quarts 9
345. s 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select Time Setup and then press and release the joystick 4 Turn the knob surrounding the joystick to scroll to Time Zone and then press and release the joystick 5 If the desired time zone setting has a check mark next to it proceed to the next step Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to select the desired time zone setting and then press and release the joystick A check mark will display next to the selection 6 Press and release the SETUP button to exit the screen Changing Daylight Savings Time When On is selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting NOTE You can skip Steps 2 and 3 by pressing and holding the TIME button on the radio for three sec onds 1 Turn on the multimedia system 2 Press and release the SETUP button on the radio 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 If Time Setup is highlighted on the menu press and release the joystick in the center of the radio Otherwise turn the knob surrounding the joystick to sele
346. s Service Contract and you require service after the manufactur er s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer 482 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United S
347. s and release the CMTC reset button to increase the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE The factory default zone is 8 During program ming the zone value will wrap around from zone 15 to zone 1 Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission in the PARK position 2 Press and hold the CMTC reset button for approxi mately 10 seconds until the current variance zone num ber is displayed 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 3 Release the CMTC reset button then press and hold again for approximately 10 seconds until the direction is displayed with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea pecnont Vehicle Information Center EVIC tures a driver interactive display It is located in the Compass display instrument cluster below the fuel and temperature e Outside temperature display gauges Vehicles equipped with stee
348. s one of the four arrow buttons to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror position following an adjustment Heated Mirrors If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle for further information Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror rotate the sun visor downward and swing the mirror cover upward The light will turn on automati cally Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light Illuminated Vanity Mirror 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Sun Visor Slide On Rod Feature If Equipped This feature allows for additional flexibility in position ing the visor to block out the sun 1 Fold down the sun visor 2 Unclip the visor from the center clip 3 Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to extend it Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Refer to Uconnect Phone in the Uconnect User Manual located on the DVD for further details VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Refer to Voice Command in the Uconnect Phone User Manual located on the DVD for further details SEATS Seats are a primary part of the O
349. s or end play replace if necessary O C O O O L O C C C L L L M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer N MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 473 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 474 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule LJ Change the e
350. s that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Uconnect Multimedia SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV IF EQUIPPED Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting technology to provide streaming video The subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio SIRIUS Back seat TV offers three video channels for family enter tainment directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii or Canada and has limited coverage in Alaska Refer to your Video Entertainment System VES RER Navigation RBZ Multimedia or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM VES IF EQUIPPED The optional Video Entertainment System VES in cludes the following components for rear seat entertain ment e A diagonal 8 in 20 cm Liquid Crystal Display LCD screen integrated into the center overhead console The screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See e The LCD Screen swings down from the console
351. scroll wheel on the iPod mobile digital device Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the previous track in the list and turning this button at any other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the current track RW Rewind Button Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the current track Holding the RW button long enough will take you back to the beginning of the current track Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five seconds of the current track FF Fast Forward Button Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the current track Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five seconds of the current track SEEK Buttons Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next track If the left down button is pressed during the first two seconds of the current track it will go back to the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 previous track in the list if you press this button at any other time in the current track it will go back to the beginning of the track If the right up button is pressed during Play mode it will go to the next track in the list INFO Button Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the information Track Title Artist Album etc for that track Each press of
352. selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan scan and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select th
353. sh for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 407 the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start the engine This means that the vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If the OBD II system is not ready you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility If this vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive the vehicle as you normally would in order for the OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether the vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have the vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail the vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE You
354. sible Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions 24 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of C an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 25 Electronic Stability Program ESP Br
355. sing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped bl e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped mm e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc These selections can only be made while playing a DVD VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped VES CH1 CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUD
356. sition from the front and the rear cross rail in the eighth position The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always be used to tie down the load Check the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains securely attached CAUTION e Cross rails should remain equally spaced or paral lel at any luggage rack position for proper func tion Noncompliance could result in damage to the roof rack cargo and vehicle e To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle do not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 Ibs 68 kg Always distribute loads as evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately Continued N UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 CAUTION Continued WARNING e Long loads which extend over the windshield such as wood panels or surfboards or loads with large frontal area should be secured to both the front and rear of the vehicle Cargo must be securely tied before driving your vehicle Improperly secured loads can fly off the vehicle particularly at high speeds resulting in per sonal injury or property damage Follow the Roof Place a blanket or other protection between the Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof surface of the roof and the load rack Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners care fully when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack Wind forces due to natural causes or nearby truck traffic can add sudden upward lift to loads This
357. ss Mini Irip Computer CMTC Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with a Premium Cluster this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC messages when the appropriate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for further information On vehicles equipped with a Mid Line Cluster this display shows the compass heading N 5 E W NE NW SE and SW and the outside temperature The COMPASS TEMPERATURE DISPLAY button operates this display Press and release the button once to turn on the display Press and release it again to turn off the display Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC for further information COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE e The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating elimi nating the need to manually calibrate the compass e If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler 9 gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field The Compass Mini Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive dis play displays information on outside temperature com pass direction and trip information NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the v
358. ssage illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure Trip Functions Press and release the MENU button until one of the following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC e Average Fuel Economy e Distance To Empty NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 e Elapsed Time e Units In Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip Computer functions The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa tion e Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel average reading before the reset e Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset through the RESET button NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value e When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue un
359. ssenger models do not allow a pas senger to sit in a third row seat with the second Continued row seatback s folded flat In a collision the passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Exhaust Gas WARNING e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the blower switch on the climate control is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be d
360. st for any reason i e repeated brake applications with the engine OFF the brakes will still function However the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating WARNING e Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot rest ing or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Driving a vehicle with the Brake Warning Light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to con trol You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 Anti Lock Brake System ABS WARNING This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking io to jue EMO en ABS inn d cannot prevent accidents including those resulting tronic Brake Control System in this section for more romi EXCESSIVE speed m parng diiy mg OR yery sp information The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the tract
361. start the engine Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off and then proceed to the next step 3 Unbuckle the driver s seat belt allow the seat belt to retract and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times ending with the seat belt buckled NOTE Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn on while the seat belt retracts and turn off while re buckling the seat belt It may be necessary to completely retract the seat belt each time 4 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming The BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this pro cedure NOTE When the BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the driver s seat belt is unbuckled or retracted Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if
362. system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transaxle control systems When these systems are oper ating properly your vehicle will provide excellent per formance and fuel economy as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emissions control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the word gASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap until a clicking sound is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started 406
363. t Airflow Control Valve The compartment cools when the airflow is open the engine is running and the Air Conditioning A C is on or the Automatic Temperature Control ATC system is set for automatic operation if equipped This allows you to cool the compartment when the climate control is in the cooling or heating mode NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 NOTE Whether operating a Manual Heating and A C system or operating an ATC system in the manual mode the A C indicator must be ON to cool the compartment CARGO AREA FEATURES Rechargeable Flashlight If Equipped The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging station in the left rear quarter trim panel To remove it press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and release Rechargeable Flashlight NOTE Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation the next time you need it 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Cargo Management System Seven Passenger System Features Five Passenger System Features e A large built in storage bin with a hinged hardcover e A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built in Od ee Ee SHOOT Dee ae na Pareto storage bin A tri fold door built into the load floor that allows easy access to items in the built in storage bin 60 40 split second row passenger seats with fold flat feature which allows for extended cargo s
364. t Trailer Tongue Weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs EXAMPLE 1 Occupant 2 130 lbs yc Occupant 3 160 Ibs See EA 100 Ibs ENS 80 Ibs 865 Ibs is 1 De eee n EXAMPLE 2 Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 Ibs EXAMPLE 3 Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 865 Ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 333 334 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult over heating and in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary lems You could lose control of your vehicle areas are affected by improper tire pressure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Continued ee STARTING AND
365. t of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield or rear window Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield or rear window Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid damaging the blade Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Rear Wiper Removal Installation 1 Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward this will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the liftgate glass 072607741 1 Wiper Arm 2 Pivot Cap NOTE The rear wiper arm cannot be rais
366. t side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE
367. tant that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid No chemical flushes should be used in any transaxle only the approved lubricant may be used Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transaxle as the chemicals can damage your transaxle components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtai
368. tart Mode without Driving the Vehicle Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position l in order to drive the vehicle To Turn Off the Engine While in Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button one time NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie DOOR LOCKS P Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock plunger on each door trim panel downward To unlock the front doors pull the inside door handle to the first detent To unlock the rear doors pull the door lock plunger on the door trim panel upward 021807224 Manual Door Lock Plunger If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door NOTE The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the liftgate N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 WARNING Power Door Locks A power door
369. tates and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer N cr YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 483 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B ov PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover
370. tch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position However do not start the engine 4 Within 30 seconds press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 5 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming NOTE If you do not hear the chime it means that the system did not enter the programming mode and you will need to repeat the procedure 6 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Child Protection Door Lock System Rear Doors ee To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats the rear doors are equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock system tate t AE Sone To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System 1 Open the rear door 2 Insert the tip of the emergency key or alike into the child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position Child Lock Control 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door NOTE When the Child Protection Door Lock system is engaged the door can be opened only by using the outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in the unlocked position NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 WARNING To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock System Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a co
371. ter battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi tive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between RE VERSE and 1st gear Using the least accelerator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spin ning the wheels is most effective NOTE trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle Refer to Electronic Stability Program ESP in Starting and Operating for further information e If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con CAU
372. the INFO button will take you to the next screen of data for that track Once you have seen all of the screens the last press of the INFO button will take you back to the Play mode screen on the radio REPEAT Button Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing track SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the desired track press the SCAN button again During the SCAN mode you can also press the SEEK button to the left or right to go to the previous or next tracks RND Random Button RES REL Radios Only Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle on and shuffle off modes of the iPod If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the Shuffle mode is on List or Browse Mode During Play mode pressing any of the following buttons will take you to List mode List mode enables you to scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod device 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TunelScroll Knob In the List mode the Tune Scroll knob functions in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod Turning the Tune Scroll knob clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through lists dis playing the track detail on the radio display Once you have the track to be played highlighted on the radio display press the Tune Scroll knob t
373. the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite r
374. the parking brake Always apply the parking ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transaxle in brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving CAUTION unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key fob in the ignition switch A child could operate power windows other con trols or move the vehicle If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued 314 STARTING AND OPERATING xe BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic BRAKE brake systems If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability the remaining system will still function However there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle In addition if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the hydraulic system the Brake Warning Light will turn on as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder In the event power assist is lo
375. the screen After five seconds this note will disappear 7 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again Turning ParkView On or Off Without Navigation Multimedia Radio Press the menu hard key 2 Select system setup soft key 3 Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting enable rear camera in reverse soft key NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 4 When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE an image of the rear of the vehicle will appear with a caution note to check entire surroundings displayed across the top of the screen 5 When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE the rear camera mode is exited and the audio screen appears again OVERHEAD CONSOLE The overhead console contains courtesy reading lights storage for sunglasses an interior observation mirror and an optional power sunroof switch 033307594 Overhead Console Courtesy Reading Lights Refer to Lights Courtesy Reading Lights in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle for further information 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Sunglasses Storage To access the storage compartment press on the raised bars on the compartment door in the center of the console and release and the door will swing downward Interior Observation Mirror The convex interior observation mirror provides the driver and f
376. the vent position This is called Express Vent which operates regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof in certain open or par tially open positions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open then adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Ignition Off Operation For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with the EVIC the power sunroof switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes afte
377. then WARNING forward to open the seat to the detent position J Y A Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely Lf P into position before using the seat Otherwise the seat will not provide the proper stability for passen gers An improperly latched seat cushion could cause serious injury 035207221 Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment NN UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Second Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage Second Row Map Pocket and Grocery Retainers Bin If Equipped This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located the seatback armrest is down Be sure to remove all on the back of the drivers seatback items from this bin before raising the seatback armrest 81d030b3 wssewws Grocery Retainers Armrest Cubby Bin 2 Map Storage 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M In Floor Storage Bin with Removable Liner NOTE Position the front seat to at least a mid track position to provide easier access to the storage bin An in floor storage bin is located behind each front seat Each 1 6 gal 5 9 1 bin can hold up to 12 12 oz 0 35 1 cans plus ice or other items The removable bin liner allows for easy filling emptying and cleaning In Floor Storage Bin To access the bin position the floor mat aside if equipped Pull the door latch release loop upward to release the latch and then
378. til the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display e Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL e Units In The EVIC odometer and navigation system if equipped can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the RESET button until U S or METRIC appears To Reset The Display Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being displayed Press and release the RESET button once to clear the resettable function being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the RESET button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function gt Reset ALL will display during this three second window Compass Display ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped 0 of eight compass readings and the outside temperature The compass readings indi COMPAss cate the direction the vehicle is facing TEMPERATURE Button Press and release this button to display one NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera
379. to a portable MP3 player through the vehicle s speakers For vehicles equipped with the Video Entertainment System VES separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play through the system s wireless headphones This means rear seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional rear seat entertainment system while the driver and front seat passenger listen to the radio Other special features include music type selections traffic messaging optional easy store presets parental lockout for VES if equipped and a backup camera display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for detailed operating instructions Clock Setting Procedure The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites The satellites clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the sys tem s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set EN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Changing the Time Zone NOTE You can skip Step
380. to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear the center instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear seat passengers Bi Level Mode ugh Air comes from the instrument panel outlets floor outlets and defrost outlets A slight amount of air is also directed through the side window demister outlets NOTE In many temperature positions the BI LEVEL mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets Mix Mode We Air comes from the floor defrost and side window vel demist outlets This mode works best in cold or snowy conditions It allows you to stay comfort able while keeping the windshield clear Defrost Mode Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets Use DEFROST mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE While operating in the other modes the system will not automatically sense the presence of fog mist or ice on the windshield DEFROST mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 The SNOWFLAKE button or A C button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system When in SNOWFLAKE mode and the ATC display is on coo
381. to up feature Pull the window switch up to the second detent release and the window will go up automatically To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto up operation push down on the switch briefly To close the window part way pull the window switch up to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop NOTE e f the window runs into any obstacle during Auto closure it will reverse direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING There is no anti pinch protection when the window is almost closed To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and objects from the window path before closing the window Such en trapment may result in serious injury Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door trim panel allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls press and release the window lockout button setting it in the down position To enable the window controls press and release the window lockout button again setting it in the up position 021807257 Window Lockout Switch THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTIN
382. transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill erade Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured They could operate the windows other vehicle controls or move the vehicle CAUTION DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Se REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have an accident DRIVE Six Speed Transaxle This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts downshifts and best fuel economy However use the AutoStick mode and select the 5 range when frequent trans
383. ttach the tether strap to the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint preferably between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions e Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap e When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them In addition never leave unattended children in the vehicle 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when insta
384. tton on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors and liftgate The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button on a
385. ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 ECO Fuel Saver Mode If Equipped The ECO message will display below the outside tem perature in the EVIC display This message will appear whenever you are driving in a fuel efficient manner This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and it can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by slowly completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL message displayed in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or is inaccurate you can calibrate the compass manually by performing the fol lowing steps 1 Turn the ignition switch ON 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 4 3 Press the SCROLL button until CALIBRATE COM PASS displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the RESET button to start the
386. type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake Warning Light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants
387. udder Using a transmission fluid b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between other than that recommended by the manufacturer the lower two holes in the area marked COLD will result in more frequent fluid and filter a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper two holes in the dipstick changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for fur ther information If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not overfill Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated properly N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 Fluid Level Check 3 5L Engine The automatic transaxle has no dipstick and is dealer serviced only Fluid and Filter Changes Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information In addition change the fluid and filter if the transaxle is disassembled for any reason Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information It is impor
388. uine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for information pertaining to the cooling system and coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Defrost Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side win dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located
389. umber will display NE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMEN
390. un wanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key fob to the LOCK position The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transaxle Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed BTSI Override There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical system malfunction occurs i e dead battery To activate the override system perform the following steps 1 Firmly apply the parking brake 300 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 Insert the key fob into the ignition switch and rotate it to the ON position 3 Remove the cubby bin liner located in the center console behind the shift lever 4 Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole at the front of the cubby bin and push the manual override release lever forward 5 While
391. ur vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and Rotate tires replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the CV joints Inspect the exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage wear improper looseness or end play replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer NN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 465 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs 2 4L Engine Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle in dusty or off road conditions inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings and replace if necessary Replace the air conditioning filter 1f equipped Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals
392. ure loads safely when the vehicle is moving Cargo Tie Downs 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the seatback This could impair visibility or become a The weight and position of cargo and passengers can dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts handling To avoid loss of control resulting in per sonal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle e Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits de scribed on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover If Equipped Five door center pillar Passenger Models e Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put NOTE The purpose of this cover is for privacy not to heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible secure loads It will not prevent cargo from shifting or rotect f l e Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear E pe seel HOM VOE Cerne axle Too much weight or improperly placed weight The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to cargo area behind the top of the rear seats sway
393. uring emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence do not pump the brakes Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 WARNING BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS functions similar t
394. uropean design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in NS 1 AF TING AND OPERATING 327 TIRE SIZING TERMS 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carr Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 328 STARTING AN
395. use EE EE ee TEE 28 A Manual Door Locks sass edem 28 O Power Door Locks ugs 6 ydo HER MEd 29 o Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOO ct ERR SORAS AS TENES EE 52 M Windows 00 cee ee eee 34 Power WINdOWS 2 22399 wb ER ERAFBI 34 OWind BUGUN sa oos oy AD RR PER EE 37 NE m 38 W Occupant Restraints ss EE ee 39 O Lap Shoulder Belts 2244544495 4602088 DR A1 O Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 47 o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode IP PQUIDPCG cuu ooo toa d X VD ich pee DU 47 O Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped 48 D Supplemental Rear Impact Active Head Restant AHR cs c2mt1 ebb00o8 o0 He Be 48 O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System dee dle die vy N y rr 93 dens eae N 52 O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 53 Er Seat belt Extender 4c 424 4 ee 544 RICE HE 54 W Safety Tips O Supplemental Restraint System SRS DES rm 54 H Advanced Front Airbag Features 56 H Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls 61 D Event Data Recorder EDR 68 Eli dd estat void RES LOL SR ROSE 70 Mi Engine Break In Recommendations 82 D Transporting Passengers PP di de AA ANKE rE erir E nee eae O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The VENICE 4 2 eo ease og EE ee Hes eee oe D Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD A
396. utside air position e n order to prevent fogging when the RECIRCULA TION button is pressed and the mode control is set to PANEL the A C will engage automatically e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb ing the mode control selection Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired press the A C button to turn off the indicator light and the A C compressor Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature Air Conditioning Operation Push on this button to engage the Air Conditioning A C A light will illu minate when the A C System is en gaged 045607557 NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds Max A C For maximum cooling use the A C and RECIRCULA TION mode buttons at the same time Three Zone Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Systems If Equipped With the Three Zone Temperature Control System each front seat occupant can independently control the Heat ing Ventilation and Air Conditioning operations coming from the outlets on their side of the vehicle UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 81dc1922 Three Zone Manual Climate Control Left Temperature 2 PANEL 3 BI LEVEL 4 Front Blower 5 FLOOR 6 MIX 7 Right Temperature 8 Rear DEFROST 9 RECIRCULATION 10 Front DEFROST 11 Air Conditioning A C 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M
397. ve the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul der belts properly The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance NN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru ment panel Side airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat
398. ved e Unlock the doors automatically If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas us
399. vehicle 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector Va turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp housing 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the taillamp housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clock wise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners Changing the Tail Lamp or Backup Lamp 1 Open the liftgate 2 Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillamp hous ing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate 3 Carefully insert a trim stick plastic flat blade tool between the taillamp housing and the liftgate Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the taillamp housing from the liftgate 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Rotate the applicable bulb s electrical connector 4 5 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing the replacement bulb 6 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the housing and rotate the connector 1 4 turn clockwise to lock it in place 7 Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners 81dd40b7 1 Tail Lamp Bulb 2 Backup Lamp Bulb N MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 License Plate Lamp 1 Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that position License Lamp 2 Inse
400. ving safely bring the vehicle to a stop and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED This light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine The engine oil level must be checked using the proper procedure 18 Charging System Warning Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should turn on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or turns on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the fog lights or rear defroster If the light remains on it means that the charging system is experiencing a problem See your local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 19 Cruise Indicator Light If Equipped cruise This indicator lights when the electronic speed control system is turned on 20 Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button If Equipped Changing the Display Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of two trip odometer settings or the ECO display The letter A or B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles km The odometer must be in TRIP mode to reset it Resetting the Trip Odometer Display the trip mileage that you
401. want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approxi mately two seconds until the display resets to 0 The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odom eter UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 Each tire including the spare if provided 1 by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should 21 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accord ingly when the low tire pressure telltale light illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to over heat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance
402. will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Button NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or when starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF button Once the situation requiring Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF button This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ee STARTING AND OPERATING 323 ESP BAS Warning Light and ESP TCS Indicator Light The malfunction indicator for the ESP is com ESP bined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and the ESP TCS Indicator Light in the instrument cluster both turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position They should both turn off with the engine running If the ESP BAS Malfunction Indicator Light turns on continuously with the engine running a mal function has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e he ESP TCS Indicator Light and the ESP BAS Mal function Indicator Light will turn on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignitio
403. with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through
404. wn the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across WARNINCG your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver s seat and front passenger s seat the shoul der belt can be adjusted upward or downward to posi tion the belt away from your neck Push and fully depress the button above the webbing to release the anchorage then move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average y
405. wo to five minutes the seat WARNING CAUTION e Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes Repeated overheating of the seat could damage the heating element and or degrade the material of the seat spinal cord injury medication alcohol use ex haustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Continued 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 60 40 Split Second Row Passenger Seats WARNING To provide additional storage area each second row passenger seat can be folded flat This allows for ex e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area tended cargo space and still maintains some seating room inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people if needed riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat NOTE Prior to folding the second row passenger seat make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position This will allow the seat to fold easily belt elts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly On seven passenger models do not allow a pas senger to sit in a third row seat with the second row seatback s folded flat In a collision th
406. y equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Se TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggress
407. y interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses pee ERA ee ae ea OES ees KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L Engine All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso s00dfab line having an octane rating of 87 The use RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines 3 5L Engine The 3 5L engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfac tory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline hav ing an octane range of 87 to 89 The manu facturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RM METHOD 89 800dfab7 Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such STARTING AND OPERATING 353 as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these sympt
408. yed on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata Track Title Artist Al bum etc information display on radio e the iPod can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The iPod battery charges when plugged into the UCI connector if supported by the specific iPod device Connecting The iPod Device Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod to the vehicle s UCI connector which is located in the glove box or center console on some vehicles This location may vary with vehicle Once the iPod is connected and synchronized to the vehicle system this may take a few seconds to connect the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod display and it starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below Controlling The iPod Using Radio Buttons To get into the UCI iPod mode and access a connected iPod press the AUX button on the radio faceplate Once in the UCI iPod mode the iPod audio track if available from iPod will start playing over the vehicle audio system 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Play Mode When switched to UCI mode the iPod will be in Play mode In Play mode you may use the following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the iPod and display data Tune Scroll Knob Use the Tune Scroll knob to go to the next or previous track The Tune Scroll knob functions similar to the
409. you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows e For vehicles equipped with the EVIC refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Un derstanding Your Instrument Panel for further infor mation e For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but no longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Pressing the LOCK bu
410. ything to the fuel An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service Fuel System Cautions assistance CAUTION e The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of Continued such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance 356 STARTING AND OPERATING M NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions con WARNING Continued trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can Carbon Monoxide Warnings kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into Follow the precautions below to p

Dodge 2009 Caliber SRT4 Automobile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents